2017 Jeep Grand Cherokee SRT Owner&#39

2017 Jeep Grand Cherokee SRT Owner&#39
2017 Grand Cherokee SRT
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
17WK742-126-AE
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2017
OWNER’S MANUAL
Fifth Edition Rev 3
Printed in U.S.A.
Grand Cherokee
SRT
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
4
5
SAFETY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
5
6
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
7
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
8
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
9
10
MULTIMEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
10
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
11
12
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
12
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
▫ Essential Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . .7
▫ Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship,
distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from many
passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take time to
become familiar with your vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission,
and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles
on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve
with experience. When driving off-road, or working the
vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle, or expect the vehicle to
overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial, and local laws
wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision.
Refer to “Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle best, has factory-trained
technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
INTRODUCTION
Symbols
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe
manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it
may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.
Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Always buckle up.
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle.
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may
miss important information. Observe all Warnings and
Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
7
1
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
CONTENTS
䡵 FRONT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
䡵 REAR VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
䡵 INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Hood/Engine Compartment
2 — Windshield
3 — Headlights
4 — Wheels/Tires
5 — Exterior Mirrors
6 — Door Handles
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
REAR VIEW
2
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
12 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Vents
2 — Multifunction Lever
3 — Steering Wheel
4 — Instrument Cluster
5 — Paddle Shifter
6 — Glove Compartment
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 13
INTERIOR
2
Interior Features
1 — Power Window Switches
2 — Seats
3 — Transmission Gear Selector
4 — Switch Panel
5 — Climate Controls
6 — Radio
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Irregular Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Vehicle On Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .27
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .32
▫ How To Use Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
䡵 DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
3
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . . . . . . . .36
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . .58
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Power Adjustment (Front Seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped. . .61
▫ Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .51
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints —
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
▫ Head Restraints — Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
䡵 STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . .56
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . . . . . . .57
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Automatic Headlight Leveling —
HID Headlights Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . . . .64
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
▫ Lights-On Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . .65
▫ Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Lane Change Assist — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . . . .67
▫ Battery Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . .71
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
䡵 HEADLIGHT WASHERS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .76
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Power Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Auto-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection . . . .86
▫ Reset Auto-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
▫ Window Lockout Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
䡵 COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Opening Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Closing Sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Opening Power Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Closing Power Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
3
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .101
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . . . .101
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . . .104
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
䡵 HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ To Open The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ To Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition
system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system.
The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.
3
NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a handheld key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: In the ON/RUN position, the lock button is disabled. Only the unlock button is enabled.
Key Fob
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors and the liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of
the unlock button. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will be activated.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button
Key Fob With Emergency Key
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob
(side opposite of the Emergency Key) against the ENGINE
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
“Doors” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push the interior door unlock button on the door panel.
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and liftgate.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to
acknowledge the signal. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” located
in “Multimedia” for further programmable information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Doors”
in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and pull the emergency key out with your other
hand.
3
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors will lock. The doors will unlock again automatically
if the key is left inside the passenger compartment, otherwise the doors will stay locked.
Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote
Control
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for further information.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of the emergency key, a #2 flat blade screwdriver, or a coin and
gently pry the two halves of the key fob apart. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Separating Case With A Coin
Emergency Key Removal
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by your
authorized dealer.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
WARNING!
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar and replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves together.
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• Always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
3
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Black keys (6.4L) must be replaced with black keys
and Red Keys (6.2L) must be replaced with Red Keys.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating modes
which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The
three positions are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
NOTE: If the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
START/STOP Ignition Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, alarm, etc.)
are still available.
ACC
• Engine is not started.
• Some electrical devices are available.
RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• The engine will start.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: Refer to ⬙Starting The Engine,⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information.
3
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicle On Message
WARNING! (Continued)
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition to
the chime, the message will display “Ignition Or Accessory
On” in the cluster.
NOTE: The power window switches and power sunroof
(if equipped) will remain active up to ten minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, place
the engine in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition is in “OFF” position, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate
Control, vented seats (if equipped) in temperatures above
80° F (26.7° C), and the optional heated seats, and optional
heated steering wheel in temperatures below 40° F (4.4° C).
Refer to “Front Heated Seats” and “Front Ventilated Seats”
in “Seats” in this section for further information.
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
How To Use Remote Start
• Push Remote Start button on the key fob twice within
five seconds. Pushing the Remote Start button a third
time shuts the engine off.
• With remote start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes
(time out) unless the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
• The vehicle must be manually started with a push of the
ignition START/STOP button after two consecutive time
outs.
3
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
WARNING! (Continued)
(CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death
when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message
• PANIC button not pushed
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely:
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• Remote Start Aborted Timer Expired
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Remote Start Aborted Liftgate Open
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide
(Continued)
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active until
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice.
Then the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is disabled when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow
the remote start cycle to complete the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable the one time push of the Remote Start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock
the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via
the door handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instrument
cluster display until you push the ignition START button.
Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, Auto-Comfort will work
anytime the temperature conditions are correct. When the
feature is enabled, regardless of Remote Start or regular
keyless start, the driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
3
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start is activated. These features will stay on
through the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The Auto Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Uconnect system. For more information on Comfort System operation, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid key
fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will
shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is
used to start the engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position,
the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by your
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Irregular Operation
Programming key fobs may be performed at your authorized dealer.
The system uses a key fob, an Ignition Node Module,
Keyless Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to
crank if an invalid key fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds
if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
3
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
During normal operation, after placing the keyless ignition
in the ON/RUN mode, the Vehicle Security Light will turn
on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains
on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem
with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash
after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an
invalid key fob to try to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition for
unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release
are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle
security alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals:
• The horn will pulse
• The turn signals will flash
• The vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will
flash
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the “OFF”
mode.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make sure
the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Doors⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know
Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the passive entry door handle to unlock the door,
refer to ⬙Doors⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information.
• Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to disarm the
system.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed during power
liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not disarm
the vehicle security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will
sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
3
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off
after approximately 90 seconds, and then the vehicle
security alarm will rearm itself.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
vehicle security alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
The power door locks can be manually locked from inside
the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock each door,
push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the
door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. If the lock
knob is down when the door is closed, the door will lock.
Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
NOTE: Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
vehicle security alarm.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on each front
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
NOTE: The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
3
Power Door Lock Switch
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the keys are
found inside the car when door lock button on trim is used
to lock the door. At the third attempt, the doors will lock
even if the key is inside.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in
ACC or ON/RUN and the driver’s door is open, the doors
will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside the
vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door may be
unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
To Unlock From The Driver Side
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry. This feature allows you to lock and unlock
the vehicle’s door(s) and fuel door without having to push
the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automatically.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in
any passive entry vehicle:
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle
while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
• When the vehicle security alarm is in pre-arm or armed
status and the liftgate transitions from open to closed.
• When the liftgate transitions from opened to closed and
remote start is active.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
Passive Entry key fob inside the car, the car will unlock and
alert the customer.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following
conditions are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle
within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door handle.
3
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles,
pushing the passive entry lock button will lock the vehicle.
NOTE: DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
3
• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect System, the
key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadvertent
Locking of Passive Entry Key Fob in Vehicle⬙ remains
active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic
liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the passive entry lock button located on the
outside liftgate door handle.
NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will lock all
doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release.
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission gear selector was not in PARK, then is
placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a ChildProtection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can be
opened only by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain
it is in the desired position.
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it is
in the desired position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, pull up on the
door lock knob (unlocked position), roll down the window,
and open the door with the outside door handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the
outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged
(locked).
Power Adjustment (Front Seats)
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
3
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch; the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat
switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar
support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
raise and lower the position of the support.
To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating
room.
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to
fold down easily.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
Power Lumbar Switch
Rear Seat Release
3
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left
outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.
• Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right
outboard seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference
from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
WARNING!
Rear Seat Folded
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children when
the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously
injured in a collision. Children should be seated and
using the proper restraint system.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever at the
desired position. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile contains desired position settings for
the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt and telescopic
steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your key fob can also be programmed to
recall the same positions when the unlock button is
pushed.
Rear Seat Release
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one
key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and the other
key fob can be linked to memory position 2.
3
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
• The set (S) button, which is used to activate the memory
save function.
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either of
two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN position
(Do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences
(i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic steering
column [if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster display will display which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory Seat Switch
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key
Fob To Memory” in this section.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock
button on the key fob.
NOTE: Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key
fob.
NOTE: Before programming your key fobs you must select
the “Memory Linked To FOB” feature through the
Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the
set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or (2)
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display
in the instrument cluster.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
memory switch, push memory button (1) on the
memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
memory position 1.
3
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
memory switch, push memory button (2) on the
memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
memory position 2.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by pushing any of the
seat adjustment switches. When a recall is canceled,
the driver’s seat and steering column (if equipped) stop
moving. A delay of one second will occur before another
recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you
have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm)
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or
equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or RUN
position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped
with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. The
indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons indicate the level
of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for HI,
one for LO and none for OFF.
• Press the heated seat button
setting on.
once to turn the HI
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting on.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
heating elements off.
a third time to turn the
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
3
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
On some models, the two rear outboard seats may be
equipped with heated seats. There are two heated seat
switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for OFF.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating. Push the
switch a second time to select LO-level heating. Push the
switch a third time to shut the heating elements off.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system
will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately
60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
number of indicator lights changes from two to one,
indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn off
automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
the ventilated seat off.
once to choose HI.
a second time to
a third time to turn
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
to operate.
3
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING! (Continued)
On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote
start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front
Seats
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear-impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
(Continued)
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection
of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints (AHR)
will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft
foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the driver or
front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
Adjustment Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
3
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the
head restraints require removal, see your authorized
dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint,
refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active Head
Restraints (AHR)” in “Safety” for further information.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat is
folded to a load floor position, but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard head restraints are not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward
on the head restraint to lower it.
NOTE: The center head restraint can be adjusted when
occupied, or removed for Child Seat Tethering. To remove
the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go by pulling
upward. Then, push the release button at the base of the
post while pulling the head restraint upward. To reinstall
the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint
to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
Folded Rear Head Restraint
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
3
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Center Head Restraint Release Button
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.
STEERING WHEEL
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your key fob or the memory switch on the
driver’s door trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in this section for further information.
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an
average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shutting off. This time may vary depending on the temperature
of the environment. The heated steering wheel can shut off
early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is
already warm.
3
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
the heating element on.
once to turn
• Press the heated steering wheel button
to turn the heating element off.
a second time
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING! (Continued)
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
(Continued)
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view
viewing.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at
the base of the mirror. A light in the button will illuminate
to indicate when the dimming feature is activated.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of
the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
Automatic Dimming Mirror Button
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
3
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If Equipped
The outside mirrors will automatically adjust for glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the
inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror
adjusts.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push the mirror select button for the mirror that you want
to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror
to move.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the
optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
3
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push the
switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the
normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled, a
potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors
back to the home position. If the mirror does not electrically fold, check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area
which can cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Automatic Power Folding Mirrors
When the Automatic Fold Mirrors feature is enabled, the
exterior mirrors will fold in when exiting the vehicle (the
ignition is OFF, all doors are closed, and the doors are
locked).
• If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded, they will unfold
when the ignition is turned ON.
• If the exterior mirrors were manually folded, they will
not automatically unfold.
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory. The Automatic
Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pushing the button (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will
move slightly downward from the present position when
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory seat
setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
position.
NOTE: The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Side
Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the
visors.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.
3
Headlight Switch
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight
switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights, and fog lights
(if equipped).
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also turned
on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (off) position.
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog
light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not
as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens
cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the A (auto) position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
headlight switch out of the A (auto) position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
Only
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with
the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in
reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn
off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to
the O (off) position.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
system is on. This feature is programmable through the
Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
System” and it is activated, the headlights will automatically turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers And Washers” in this
section for further information.
NOTE:
• This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
• The headlight delay feature is automatically activated if
the customer leaves the headlight switch is in the A
(auto) position when the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
Lights-On Reminder
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the daytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to
the lower nighttime intensity.
If the headlights, parking lights or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Headlight Delay
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated
when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch
is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
The Daytime Running Lights (bright intensity) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is
not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged.
The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
3
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Multifunction Lever
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are
on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An
indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn
off when the switch is pushed a second time, when the
headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the high
beam is selected.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low
beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
out of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure
proper performance. See your local authorized dealer.
3
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes
or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome
on position for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF,
the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight
minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for
eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights
will automatically turn off.
When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating
the dimmer control all the way down, to the last (off)
detent, will cause all the interior lights to go out. This is
also known as the “Party” mode because it allows the
doors to stay open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is equipped
with remote keyless entry and the unlock button is pushed
on the key fob, the courtesy and dome lights will turn on.
Courtesy Lights
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead
console.
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a second
time. The lights will also turn on when the unlock button
on the remote keyless entry key fob is pushed.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
3
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Controls
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the instrument cluster display, radio and overhead console by rotating the control to
its farthest position up until you hear a click. This feature
is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day.
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility
of the floor and center console area.
Ambient Light
Dimmer Control
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wiper Operation
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
on the end of the lever. For information on the rear
wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Wiper/Washer” in
this section.
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
CAUTION!
Multifunction Lever
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the “park”
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
3
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Windshield Washer Operation
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving speeds
above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from
a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles
(first detent), to a cycle every one second (fourth detent).
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward the
steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the lever
is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of
the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
Windshield Washer Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the
off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles
or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
3
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end of the
lever downward to the MIST position and release for a
single wiping cycle.
NOTE: The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Mist Control
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver desires
less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the OFF
position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when
ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in the
NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper
operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other
inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The
rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located
at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the
first detent for intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more will
activate the washer pump which will continue to
operate as long as the switch is held. Upon release of the
switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper
operation. When this rotary control is in the OFF position,
rotating it downward will activate the rear washer pump
which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held.
Once the switch is released it will return to the OFF
position and the wipers will cycle several times before
returning to the parked position.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is
released the pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF,
the wiper will automatically return to the “park” position.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
3
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEADLIGHT WASHERS — IF EQUIPPED
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The multifunction lever operates the headlight washers
when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the
headlights are turned on. The multifunction lever is located
on the left side of the steering column.
Overview
To use the headlight washers, push the multifunction lever
inward (toward the steering column) and release it. The
headlight washers will spray a timed high-pressure spray
of washer fluid onto each headlight lens. In addition, the
windshield washers will spray the windshield and the
windshield wipers will cycle.
NOTE: After turning the ignition switch and headlights
ON, the headlight washers will operate on the first spray
of the windshield washer and then every eleventh spray
after that.
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
3
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Automatic Climate Controls
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change
the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Icon
Description
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
Front Defrost Button
The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
The Rear Defrost Control button turns on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button
on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
3
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Panel Mode
Description
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature
setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the blower
bar area between the icons.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Icon
Bi-Level Mode
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
Description
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
This button turns the Climate Control System off.
3
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior
settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
The Recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off
the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the
vehicle.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield.
NOTE:
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
3
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode
must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
glass.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air
with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Winter Operation
Outside Air Intake
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it may
cause window fogging.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin
air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
3
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time
is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
down briefly and release it when you want the window to
stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not
let children play with power windows. Do not leave the
key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while
operating the power window switches. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
Lift the window switch up, for a short period of time, and
release and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch
briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
NOTE:
Auto-Down Feature
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
The driver door power window switch and the passenger
door power window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down, for a short period of time,
and release and the window will go down automatically.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold
to close the window manually.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button (the indicator light on
the button with turn on). To enable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn back off).
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the window is
fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
3
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED
CommandView Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
The CommandView sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
The power shade switch is located to the right between the
sun visors on the overhead console.
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
WARNING! (Continued)
children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof
The sunroof has two programmed automatic stops for the
sunroof open position; a comfort stop position and a full
open position. The comfort stop position has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting.
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof will open automatically to the comfort
stop position. Push the switch rearward and release it
again, the sunroof will open to the full open position and
automatically stop. This is called “Express Open”. During
Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will stop automatically at the comfort stop
position. Push and hold the switch rearward again, the
sunroof will open to the full open position and automatically stop. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically open to the half open position
prior to the sunroof opening.
3
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Closing Sunroof
Express Mode
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically.
This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Opening Power Shade
Express
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to
the halfway position and stop automatically. Push the
switch a second time from the halfway position and the
shade will automatically open to the full open position and
stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During
Express Open operation, any movement of the shade
switch will stop the shade.
Manual Mode
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward. The
shade will open and stop automatically at the half-open
position. Push and hold the shade switch rearward again
and the shade will open automatically to the full-open
position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement
and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition
until the switch is pushed again.
Closing Power Shade
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will
close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the shade.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again will
automatically close both the sunroof and shade completely.
Manual
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the forward
position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement
and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition
until the switch is pushed again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in
the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Wind Buffeting
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
3
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof Maintenance
HOOD
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
To Open The Hood
Ignition Off Operation
NOTE:
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel
and in front of the driver’s door.
• The power sunroof switch can remain active in Accessory Delay for up to approximately ten minutes after the
vehicle’s ignition is placed to the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
• This feature is programmable using the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Hood Release
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left and
lift the hood.
To Close The Hood
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other
hand remove the support rod from its seat and reinsert
it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from
the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the
hood is completely closed.
WARNING!
Safety Latch Location
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
3
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
Opening
The liftgate can be opened from inside the vehicle using the
power liftgate button on the overhead console, using the
key fob outside of the vehicle or the electronic liftgate
release.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
the instrument cluster display, all doors will unlock when
you push the electronic release on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect, the
liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic release on
the liftgate. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
• Key fob
• Outside handle
• Button on overhead console
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic
liftgate release to open with one fluid motion. Push the
button on the key fob twice within five seconds to release
the liftgate.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
NOTE: Use the power door lock switch on either front door
trim panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the liftgate. The
manual door locks on the doors and the driver’s door lock
cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate
closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Closing
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate lowering the
liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate takes over the
closing effort.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, pushing the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of the outside handle
release will lock the vehicle.
NOTE: The liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the liftgate button located on the front overhead
console. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be
closed by pushing the liftgate button located on the left rear
trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If the liftgate is in
motion, pushing the liftgate button located on the left rear
trim panel will reverse the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed two
times, the turn signals will flash to signal that the liftgate is
opening or closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in
the Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime will be
audible. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings⬙ in ⬙Multimedia” for
further information.
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the
liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate
trim panel.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the
liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power
liftgate functionality.
3
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• If the liftgate is not fully open, push the liftgate button
on the key fob twice to operate the liftgate.
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
NOTE:
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle
is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 MPH (0 km/h).
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150° F
(65° C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pushing any of the power liftgate
switches.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets
sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will
cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop
and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
Cargo Area Features
Rechargeable Flashlight
To operate the flashlight, push the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs
and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that
recharge when snapped back into place.
3
Push in on the flashlight to release it.
Flashlight Power Switch
Push Flashlight To Release
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Storage Bins
There are up to four removable storage bins located in the
rear cargo area. There are two storage bins located on either
side of the cargo area.
Two additional storage bins are located under the load
floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor
and attach the tether strap (attached to the bottom of the
load floor) to the liftgate opening.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer,
the storage bin on that side will not be available.
Tether Strap
Rear Storage Bin
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in place.
3
Rear Lower Storage Bins
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
Rear Cargo Cover
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
WARNING! (Continued)
The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
(Continued)
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a hook
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink
unit is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
The HomeLink buttons, located on the overhead console,
designate the three different HomeLink channels. The
HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position, and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Console
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
3
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
NOTE: It is NOT the button that is normally used to open
and close the door. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.⬙
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
3
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button, while
you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
NOTE:
Using HomeLink
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Troubleshooting Tips
WARNING! (Continued)
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
General Information
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com
for information or assistance.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
WARNING!
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
(Continued)
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Storage
Glove Compartment
3
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
Opened Glove Compartment
Glove Compartment
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
Console Features
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
The center console contains both an upper and a lower
storage area.
Door Panel Storage
Storage Compartment
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the lid.
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the lower
storage compartment.
3
Storage Compartment Latches
Lower Storage Compartment
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD player
located in the center console.
Overhead Console
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink), power liftgate and power sunroof switches
may also be included, if equipped.
Lower Storage Compartment CD/DVD Player —
If Equipped
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
Overhead Console
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
Sunglasses Bin Door
Cupholders
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome pad
on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the door to
close.
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
located in the center console.
3
Front Cupholders
Sunglasses Bin Door
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the fold-down center armrest.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the
ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets
labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to the
battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered outlets
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in
use to protect the battery against discharge.
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a Mopar knob
and element must be used.
Rear Cupholders
Electrical Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on
the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward on
the storage lid to open the compartment and gain access to
this power outlet.
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
3
Center Console Outlet
Front Power Outlet
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo area.
NOTE: The rear power outlet can be switched from
switched “ignition” only to constant “battery” powered all
the time. See your local authorized dealer for details.
Rear Power Outlet
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
WARNING! (Continued)
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter
Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed this
power limit, as will most new computers and power tools.
electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load
must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
dealer can order and install Mopar crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside
the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at
the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight turns
using the anti-theft wrench provided with the Mopar
crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the desired position,
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the
crossbar is in the desired position, retighten the with the
wrench to lock the crossbar into position.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in
use, place the front and rear crossbars approximately
24 inches (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction can
then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward
or aft using increments of 1 inch (2.5 cm).
• If any cargo (or any metallic object) is placed over the
satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For improved satellite radio reception, avoid placing the rear
crossbar over the satellite radio antenna.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do not
carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars
installed. The load should be secured and placed on
top of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place a
blanket or some other protection between the load
and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
(Continued)
3
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Blue Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Green Telltale Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ White Telltale Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .160
䡵 TRIP COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
䡵 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Yellow Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
4
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
SRT Instrument Cluster
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
3. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call your authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call your
authorized dealer for service.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
•
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display features a driverinteractive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
4
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important information about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
driver interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how systems are working and give you warnings when they aren’t.
The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
through the main menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make selections and
adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display is located in the center of
the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The Main Menu items consists of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Terrain — If Equipped
• SRT Performance
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
• Trip
• Up Arrow Button
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Diagnostic
• Speed Warning
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the Main Menu items.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• OK Button
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
4
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Change Reset
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine
oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK
button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
Includes the following, but not limited to:
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
2. Navigate to ⬙Oil Life⬙ submenu in ⬙Vehicle Info⬙ in the
instrument cluster display.
• Traction Control Off
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge resets to
100%.
• Oil Pressure Low
• Washer Fluid Low
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
• Oil Change Due
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Fuel Low
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Service Anti-lock Brake System
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Service Power Steering
• Ignition Or Accessory On
• Cruise Control Off
• Vehicle Not In Park
• Cruise Control Ready
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• ACC Driver Override
• Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
• Cruise Control Set To XXX MPH
• Remote Start Canceled Too Cold
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to XX”
• Remote Start Canceled Door Open
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Remote Start Canceled Hood Open
• Speed Warning Set To XXX MPH
• Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
• Speed Warning Exceeded
• Remote Start Canceled Time Expired
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Air Bag System
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Service Air Bag Warning Light
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Door Open
• Lights On
• Doors Open
4
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Liftgate Open
• Hood Open
• Shift Not Allowed
• Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To D
cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow
button to select the analog or digital type speedometer
display. Push and release the OK button to toggle units
(mph or km/h) of the speedometer.
• Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To R
Push and release the left or right arrow buttons to change
between large and small speedometer display.
• Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P
Vehicle Info
• Service Transmission
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow
button to scroll through the information submenus and
push and release the OK button to select or reset the
resettable submenus.
• Service Shifter
The Reconfigurable Telltales section are divided into the
white, green, and amber telltales area on the left, and the
red telltales area on the right.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE: The instrument cluster display menu items display
in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may
vary depending on your vehicle features.
Tachometer With Digital Speedometer Supplemental Gauge
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
main gauge menu icon is displayed in the instrument
• Tire Pressure
• Coolant Temperature
• Transmission
Temperature
• Oil Temperature
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Life
• Battery Voltage
• Intake Air
Temperature
• Engine Torque
• Engine Power
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
Terrain — If Equipped
WARNING! (Continued)
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Terrain icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right or left arrow button to
display the Selec-Track or Drivetrain.
Selec-Track — If Equipped
• Drivetrain:
– Front Wheel Angle
– T-Case
– Axle Lock
recommended that these features be used in a controlled
environment and within the limits of the law. The
capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which can jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The Performance Features include the following:
Performance Features
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
SRT icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the left or right arrow button to
scroll through the performance feature submenus.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance
Features is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be done on any public roadways. It is
(Continued)
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Recent
– Reaction Time — If Selected
• 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Recent
– Reaction Time — If Selected
4
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• 0-60 feet (0-18 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Recent
– Reaction Time — If Selected
• 1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Recent
– Reaction Time — If Selected
• 1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Recent
– Reaction Time — If Selected
• Braking Distance
– Distance
– From Speed
• Current G-Forces
• Peak G-Forces
• Lap Timer
• Lap History
– Will list the last 4 laps with the best lap highlighted in
green.
• Top Speed
Driver Assist
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Driver Assist menu title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display.
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
and LaneSense system settings. The information displayed
depends on the status of ACC and LaneSense.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
The instrument cluster display displays the current LaneSense system settings. The information displayed depends
on LaneSense system status and the conditions that need to
be met. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument
cluster.
Fuel Economy
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Fuel Economy Icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and hold the OK button to reset average fuel
economy feature.
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
• Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi
or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in
the tank. When the Range value is less than 10 miles
(16 km) estimated driving distance, the Range display
will change to a “LOW FUEL” message. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
“LOW FUEL” message and a new Range value will
display. Range cannot be reset through the OK button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.
4
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Average – The display shows the average fuel economy
(MPG, L/100 km. or km/L) since the last reset.
• Current – This display shows the current fuel economy
(MPG, L/100 km, km/L) form while driving.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip
menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip
B. The Trip information will display the following:
• Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
• Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or
Trip B since the last reset.
• Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pushing the left or right arrow button
will allow you to scroll through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to
enter the sub-menus and follow the prompts on the screen
as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Gear Display
• Full (default setting)
• Single
Upper Left
• None
• Compass (default setting)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
• Outside Temp
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
• Time
• Cancel
• Range
• Restore
• Fuel Economy Average
Current Gear
• Fuel Economy Current
• On
• Trip A
• Off (default setting)
• Trip B
Favorite Menus — Equipped
Upper Right
• Speedometer
• None
• Vehicle Info
• Compass
• Terrain (show/hide)
• Outside Temp (default setting)
• SRT Performance Pages (show/hide)
• Time
• Driver Assist (show/hide)
• Range
• Fuel Economy (show/hide)
• Fuel Economy Average
• Trip Info (show/hide)
• Fuel Economy Current
• Audio (show/hide)
• Trip A
• Messages
• Trip B
• Screen Setup
4
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Diagnostic Codes
• Speed Warning (show/hide)
The menu with (show/hide) means user can press OK
button to choose show or hide this menu on the instrument
cluster display.
Diagnostics
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Diagnostics icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the OK button to display
the diagnostic trouble codes and descriptions. When the
end of the list is reached, ⬙No or End of Diagnostic Code⬙
will appear in the instrument cluster display.
Speed Warning
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Speed Warning Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button
to enter speed warning. Use the up or down arrow button
to select a desired speed, then push and release the OK
button to set the speed. The Speed Warning telltale will
display in the instrument cluster display, and a chime will
sound with a pop up warning message when the set speed
is exceeded.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Warning And Indicator
Lights And Messages” located in ”Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be effected by load
reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 150W Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 150W, USB ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game
consoles and similar devices.
4
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
What to do when an electrical load reduction action message
is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
150W, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
TRIP COMPUTER
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip A or Trip B icon is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or
Trip B). Push and release the OK button to display the Trip
information.
Trip A
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
To Reset A Trip Function
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is selected
(highlighted). Push and hold the OK button to clear the
resettable function being displayed.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator light switches on in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained
in the Owner Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you
to a vehicle condition that may become serious. Some
lamps will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make
sure they work. If any lamps remain on after starting your
vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for
further information.
4
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s or passenger seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems”
in “Safety” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will
run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
4
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a
set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
4
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates vehicle oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency.”
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped
and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle under power, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is under power, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If
the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Electric Power Steering System).
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
4
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn on when the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Hood Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
4
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Custom Mode SRT Indicator Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Custom Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Custom Mode SRT is active. Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Yellow Telltale Lights
Engine Malfunction Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Vehicle Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors emissions control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before vehicle start up. If the bulb does not come on when placing the
ignition in the ON/RUN position, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after vehicle start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the vehicle is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position. It should go out when the engine is running. If the “ESC Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be ON, even
if it was turned off previously.
4
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
• The ESC telltale will flash when in an ESC event (loss of traction).
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
NOTE: This telltale indicates that an ESC event is active.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding
sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs,
repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
4
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
4
(Continued)
Low Fuel Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, and remain on
until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Warning.
Forward Collision Warning Off Warning (FCW) Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light
This light indicates a potential system fault with the FCW system. Refer to “Forward Collision
Warning” in “Safety” for further information.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) System Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense is solid yellow when the system senses a lane drift situation.
The LaneSense is flashing yellow when the system senses the lane has been approached and is in
a lane departure situation.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service. Please see
your authorized dealer.
4
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blue Telltale Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to
pass⬙ scenario.
Green Telltale Lights
Snow Mode SRT Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Snow Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Snow Mode is active. Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
4
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn Signal Warning Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal as selected, as
well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the Speed Control is SET. Refer to “Speed Control — If Equipped”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is SET and there is no target vehicle
detected. Refer to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙
for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is SET and the target vehicle is detected.
Refer to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for further
information.
4
156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sport Mode SRT Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Sport Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode SRT is active. Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Track Mode SRT Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Track Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Track Mode SRT is active. Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Tow Mode SRT Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tow Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Tow Mode SRT is active. Refer to “Selec-Track” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense —
If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
White Telltale Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control is ready, but not set.
4
158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been
turned on and in the READY state. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when none or only the
left or right lane marking has been detected. The indicator will turn green when both lanes are
detected and the system will be ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
Valet Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Valet Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Valet Mode is active. Refer to “Drive Modes” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Set Speed Warning Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Set Speed Warning Light
When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the speed warning telltale will illuminate in the instrument
cluster with a number matching the set speed. When the set speed is exceeded, a single chime will
sound along with pop up message of speed warning exceeded. When the set speed is exceeded by
1.9 mph (3 km/h) or more, the indication will light up yellow and flash along with a continuous
chime (up to ten seconds or until the speed is no longer exceeded). Speed Warning can be turned
on and off in the instrument cluster display, for further information refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel.”
NOTE: The number “120” is only an example of a speed that can be set.
4
160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
(Continued)
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
4
162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . .210
▫ Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . .180
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . .190
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . .196
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
5
164 SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one
or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic
stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
165
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake
Support (RBS), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control (HDC), and Selec-Speed Control (SSC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
5
166 SAFETY
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
SAFETY
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
(Continued)
167
WARNING! (Continued)
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
5
168 SAFETY
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing straight
forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within 20
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then back to ON.
If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released.
In order to avoid rolling down an incline while
resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer
brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
SAFETY
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
169
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
(Continued)
5
170 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
SAFETY
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to return
to ESC On.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
171
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
ON again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
“Full Off” can only be achieved in Track Mode if so
equipped.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes if so
equipped.
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
(Continued)
5
172 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or
off-road use.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is turned to the ON mode.
It should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
SAFETY
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
173
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
5
174 SAFETY
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied
to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach
full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in
wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are
in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and
Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides
torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions
in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability.
The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to
help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to
reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the
driver receives that the feature is active is the torque
applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
very important to realize that this feature will not steer the
vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
the vehicle.
SAFETY
175
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
Activating HDC
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed
for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the
HDC set speeds:
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed).
HDC Target Set Speeds
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
activate
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
Enabling HDC
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
5
176 SAFETY
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
Disabling HDC
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
NOTE: During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by
the transmission. When actively controlling HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at anytime.
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
greater than 70 seconds.
Deactivating HDC
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
Feedback To The Driver
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude,
is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the driver
about the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for HDC.
SAFETY
177
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
SSC has three states:
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to
excess speed.
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle
speed).
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range
only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling
engine torque and brakes.
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
• Driver is not applying throttle.
5
178 SAFETY
Activating SSC
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the
following conditions are met:
• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
• Driver releases throttle.
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• Driver releases brake.
• Transmission is in any selection other than P.
• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can be
adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC
set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade and the
level of set speed reduction depends on the magnitude of
grade. The following summarizes the SSC set speeds:
• During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC target
speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by the
transmission. While actively controlling SSC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected
set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
SSC Target Set Speeds
• SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select
mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and
may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
Driver Override:
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
SAFETY
179
Deactivating SSC
Feedback To The Driver:
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC switch
has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about the
state SSC is in.
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following
conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the SSC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(SSC exits immediately).
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for SSC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the SSC
switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated brakes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when driving in off road conditions. The
driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions
and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
5
180 SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when
the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a
forward gear.
SAFETY
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
181
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer
to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
5
Warning Light Location
Sensor Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
182 SAFETY
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
SAFETY
183
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less
than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
5
Overtaking/Passing
Overtaking/Approaching
184 SAFETY
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
Stationary Objects
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
185
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
5
186 SAFETY
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
SAFETY
187
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level
of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the
warnings by braking and the system determines that the
driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not
applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
system provides the driver with audible warnings, visual
warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may
apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum or partial braking to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
5
188 SAFETY
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range or
ESC Full-Off Mode is active, the FCW system will be
automatically deactivated.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph (2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
SAFETY
Turning FCW On Or Off
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
The forward collision button is located in the Uconnect
display in the controls settings.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward collision
button once.
To turn the FCW system back on, press the forward
collision button again.
Changing the FCW status to “off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from one
ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
189
The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting and the
Active Braking is in the “on” setting. This allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the
latter is at a farther distance than ⬙Medium⬙ setting. This
provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front when the distance between the vehicle in
the front is much closer. This setting provides less reaction
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows
for a more dynamic driving experience.
Changing the Active Braking status to “off” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or additional
brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision.
5
190 SAFETY
NOTE:
Service FCW Warning
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays:
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition
that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with run flat tires — when
the TPMS indicates a tire pressure of 14 psi (96 kPa) or
lower, always check tire pressure and replace the tire at the
first opportunity. At inflation pressure of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa) the tire is in the run-flat mode of operation. In this
condition, it is recommended a vehicle maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h) for a maximum distance of 50 miles
(80 km). The manufacturer does not recommend using the
run flat feature while driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or towing a trailer.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.
SAFETY
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour
period. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance”
for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment
for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold
tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has been
illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the
recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off.
191
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated
tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON.
In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value.
5
192 SAFETY
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to
assure proper TPM feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
SAFETY
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
193
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Instrument Cluster Display, and a
graphic displaying tire pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible
chime will be activated, when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the instrument cluster will display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a
graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s)
in a different color. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units in
PSI, BAR or kPa.
5
194 SAFETY
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Service TPM System Warning
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active
road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate
the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display
of the pressure value(s) will return to its original color and
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime.
The instrument cluster display will display a “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds.
This message is then followed by a graphic display, with “-“ in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
will not be present, and a pressure value will be displayed
instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by any of the
following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
SAFETY
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the
spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime will
sound, and the instrument cluster display will still display
a pressure value in the different color graphic display and
an “Inflate to XX” message will be displayed. After driving
the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h),
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster display will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. For
each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound,
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
instrument cluster display will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
195
SYSTEM⬙ message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. Once you repair
or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the
vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update
automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn OFF and the graphic in the instrument cluster display
will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the ⬙TPM Telltale Light⬙ will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will
5
196 SAFETY
display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the ⬙TPM Telltale
Light⬙ will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off.
The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message and then display pressure values in
place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer be displayed
as long as no system fault exists.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
General Information
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
• Child Restraints
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
SAFETY
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in a vehicle
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not use child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
197
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
(Continued)
5
198 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
SAFETY
199
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Change Of Status
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
(Continued)
5
200 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
SAFETY
201
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
5
202 SAFETY
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
SAFETY
203
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
5
204 SAFETY
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
SAFETY
Seat Belt Extender
205
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant,
it must be removed.
5
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
206 SAFETY
Seat Belt Pretensioner
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the risk
of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has
a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
SAFETY
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
207
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
5
208 SAFETY
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to
retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
These head restraints are passive, deployable components,
and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of
the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the
back half being decorative plastic.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any
other seat belt function is not working properly when
checked according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the
Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact
requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger
seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of
rear impacts.
SAFETY
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not
deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However, if
during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the
AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the
impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam And Trim)
Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
Head Restraint Guide Tubes
Seatback
209
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Supplemental Active
Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle.”
5
210 SAFETY
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a collision, the front half of the head restraint will be extended
forward and separated from the rear half of the head
restraint (see image). Do not drive your vehicle after the
AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must be reset into
the original position to best protect the occupant for all
types of collisions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer must
reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front passenger’s seat
before driving. Personally attempting to reset the AHRs
may result in damage to the AHRs that could impair their
function.
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all
types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an
authorized dealer immediately.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Triggered
SAFETY
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags
will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
211
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a
self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will
turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert
you if the light comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
5
212 SAFETY
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately. For additional information
regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to
“Warning/Indicator Lights And Messages” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a
supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
SAFETY
213
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
5
214 SAFETY
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
SAFETY
215
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Knee Impact Bolsters
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
5
216 SAFETY
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not
SAFETY
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the
217
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
5
218 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
SAFETY
219
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
Air Bag System Components
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation,
move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your
doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the
garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
5
220 SAFETY
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
SAFETY
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
221
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
(Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
5
222 SAFETY
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the
EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
SAFETY
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
223
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or younger
and who have not reached the height or
weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their forwardfacing child restraint, but are too small to
properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
out-grown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
5
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a fivepoint Harness, facing forward in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
224 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints
WARNING! (Continued)
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rearfacing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
(Continued)
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forwardfacing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
SAFETY
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
225
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
5
226 SAFETY
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt + Top
Anchors Only
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Tether Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
227
these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the
top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see
the following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
5
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether
anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
228 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
weight of the child restraint) for using the
combined weight of the child and the child
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
child restraint?
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH
system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
belt be used together to attach a rear-facing
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
or forward-facing child restraint?
Booster seats may be attached to the
LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your booster
seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install
position using the inner LATCH lower
a child seat in the center seating position.
anchorages?
SAFETY
229
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached using a
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
common lower LATCH anchorage?
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install
a child seat in the center position next to a
child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the
back of the front passenger seat?
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The head restraint may be removed in the
center seating position only.
5
230 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You
will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor panel
away from the seat back, this will expose the top
tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
LATCH Anchorages
SAFETY
231
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rearfacing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical installation instructions.
Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position.
5
232 SAFETY
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the strap
located on the front of the arm rest.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
SAFETY
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether
strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach
the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
233
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
5
234 SAFETY
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
SAFETY
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
235
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
5
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
236 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child
using the seat belt to install a forrestraint) for using the Tether Anchor
ward facing child restraint, up to the
with the seat belt to attach a forward
recommended weight limit of the
facing child restraint?
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front
touch the back of the front
passenger seat and the child restraint
passenger seat?
is allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The head restraint may be removed
in the center seating position only.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
tighten the seat belt against the belt
seating position with an
path of the child restraint?
ALR retractor.
SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
237
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
5
238 SAFETY
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
WARNING! (Continued)
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
(Continued)
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
SAFETY
239
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear
seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat
back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
5
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located On Seatback)
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
240 SAFETY
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
WARNING!
• The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind the
seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS
241
Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips since vehicle equipped with a gas
engine the following applies:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
5
242 SAFETY
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Air Bag Warning Light
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Defroster
Seat Belts
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
SAFETY
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
243
WARNING! (Continued)
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
your floor mat using the
• ALWAYS securely attach
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
before installing any other
FROM THE VEHICLE
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal
(if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat
interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the
vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
5
244 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and reinstalled, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are
detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The
cause should be located and corrected immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
▫ Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .257
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
▫ AutoStick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
▫ Selec-Track — If Equipped (SRT) . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED. . .270
▫ After Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .251
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .256
▫ Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
6
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . .292
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . . .277
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . .277
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ To Activate/Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .302
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .303
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .303
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . . .282
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . . .286
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC. . . . . . . . .289
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . . .313
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .314
䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . . . . . . . . .345
䡵 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Common Towing Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) — SRT . . . . .350
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal . . . . . . . .351
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Turning LaneSense On Or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ LaneSense Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
䡵 DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
6
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Automatic Transmission
• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into PARK
and apply the parking brake. Always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
child or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
(Continued)
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into
any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle stopped)
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once,
the transmission will automatically select PARK and the
engine will turn off, however the ignition will remain in
the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode). Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle
speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the START/
STOP button once will turn the engine off. The ignition
will remain in the ACC mode.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn the
engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode
(NOT the OFF mode) if the engine is turned off when
the transmission is not in PARK.
NOTE: The system will automatically time out and the
ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after 30 minutes of
inactivity if the ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine
not running) mode and the transmission is in PARK.
6
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN.
To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle
and use the accessories, follow these steps:
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode,
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC mode (instrument cluster will
display “ACC”),
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to
place the ignition to the RUN mode (instrument cluster
will display “ON/RUN”),
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF mode (instrument cluster
will display “OFF”).
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
It is recommended for the operator to observe the following
driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
After Starting
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an
extended period of time.
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than
halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
• Avoid aggressive braking.
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum
performance and maximum durability for your new SRT
Vehicle.
Despite modern technology and World Class manufacturing methods, the moving parts of the vehicle must still
wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly
during the first 500 miles (805 km) and continues through
the first oil change interval.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than
halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower gears (1st to
3rd gears).
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
6
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually
(paddles or gear shift) at higher rpms when possible.
• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelerator
pedal at wide open throttle.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time
and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools,
or similar activities during the first 1500 mi (2414 km).
NOTE: Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher
through the first oil change interval. Running the engine
with an oil level below the add mark can cause severe
engine damage.
Parking Brake
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK position.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the ON mode, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission
is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
(Continued)
6
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF mode.
6
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and
the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must
also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds.
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehicle’s
overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions.
Push the “ECO” switch in the center stack of the instrument panel to activate or disable ECO mode. A light on the
switch indicates when ECO mode is enabled.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is enabled, the
vehicle control systems will change the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
• The transmission will launch (from a stop) in second
gear.
• The torque converter clutch may engage at lower engine
speeds and remain on longer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
• The overall driving performance will be more conservative.
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhibited based on temperature and other factors.
NOTE: ECO mode is only available in AUTO, SPORT or
TRACK mode.
Active Noise Cancellation — If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancellation
System. This system uses four microphones embedded in the
headliner to detect undesirable exhaust noise, which sometimes occurs when operating in ECO mode. An onboard
frequency generator creates counteracting sound waves
through the audio system to help keep the vehicle quiet.
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To
select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear selector
and move the selector rearward or forward. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and
the brake pedal must be pressed. You must also press the
brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are selfcalibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
6
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL (AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position
(beside the DRIVE position), or tapping the shift paddles
(+/-), will manually select the transmission gear, and will
display the current gear in the instrument cluster.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear
(1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move
the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position)
for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the ignition OFF.
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
(Continued)
6
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK
position (when pushed forward), it is probably in the
AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In
AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector
to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
6
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), select TOW mode (refer to “SelecTrack” in “Starting And Operating”) or use the AutoStick
shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions,
using TOW mode or a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending
on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position) enables full manual control of transmission shifting
(also known as AutoStick mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this
section for further information). Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the engine
may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver
of the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns
OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
When To Use TOW Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs,
select TOW mode, using the rotary switch on the center
console. Selecting TOW mode will improve performance
and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or
failure due to excessive shifting. Refer to “Selec-Track” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into the
MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position), or tap
one of the shift paddles on the steering wheel. Tapping the
(-) shift paddle to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear, while tapping (+) to
enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The
current transmission gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear
selector (in the MANUAL position), or the shift paddles, to
manually shift the transmission. Tapping the gear selector
forward (-) while in the MANUAL (M) position, or tapping
the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel, will downshift
6
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
the transmission to the next lower gear. Tapping the
selector rearward (+) (or tapping the (+) shift paddle) will
command an upshift.
NOTE: The shift paddles may be disabled (or re-enabled,
as desired) using the SRT Drive Modes.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver (using the
gear selector or the shift paddles), unless an engine lugging
or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen,
except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear (or
third gear, in SNOW mode). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will
allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second or
third gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed, or holding the gear
selector in the (-) position, will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to the
DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if
the gear selector is already in DRIVE) until “D” is once
again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or
out of AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Selec-Track consists of the following positions:
Selec-Track — If Equipped (SRT)
• Sport – Dry weather, on-road calibration. Performance
based tuning that provides a rear wheel drive feel but
with improved handling and acceleration over a twowheel drive vehicle. This feature will reset to AUTO on
an ignition cycle.
Description
Selec-Track combines the capabilities of the vehicle control
systems, along with driver input, to provide the best
performance for all terrains.
Rotate the Selec-Track knob to select the desired mode.
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
such as snow. This feature will reset to AUTO upon an
ignition cycle.
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive operation can be used on and off road. Balances traction
with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel drive vehicles.
• Track – Track road calibration for use on high traction
surfaces. Driveline is maximized for traction. Some
binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. This
feature will reset to AUTO on an ignition cycle.
Selec-Track Switch
Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in the “Multimedia” section
for further information.
• Tow – Use this mode for towing and hauling heavy
loads. Vehicle suspension will go to sport mode. Trailer
sway control is enabled in the ESC system. This feature
will reset to AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
6
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
Custom
This mode allows the driver to create a custom vehicle
configuration that is saved for quick selection of favorite
settings. The system will return to AUTO mode when the
ignition switch is cycled from RUN to OFF to RUN, if this
mode is selected. While in Custom Mode the Stability,
Transmission, Steering, Suspension, all-wheel drive set up,
and Paddle shifter settings may be configured through the
custom mode set-up.
NOTE: Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in the “Multimedia”
section for further information.
Active Damping System
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled
damping system. This system reduces body roll and pitch
in many driving situations including cornering, acceleration and braking. There are 3 modes:
• Street Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO,
SNOW and CUSTOM.) — Used during highway speeds
where a touring suspension feel is desired.
• Sport Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO,
SPORT, CUSTOM and TOW.) — Provides a firm suspension for better handling.
• Track Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO,
TRACK and CUSTOM.) — Provides a full firm suspension for an aggressive track experience.
Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in the “Multimedia” section
for further information.
Launch Control — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system that
is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a
form of traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where consistent
quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The system
is not intended to compensate for lack of driver experience
or familiarity with the race track. Use of this feature in low
traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions may results in
excess wheel slip outside this systems control resulting in
an aborted launch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
Preconditions:
• Launch Control should not be used on public roads.
Always check track conditions and the surrounding area.
• Launch Control is not available within the first 500 miles
(805 km) of engine break-in.
• Launch Control should only be used when the engine
and transmission are at operating temperature.
• Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved
road surfaces only.
CAUTION!
Use on slippery or loose surfaces may cause damage to
vehicle components and is not recommended.
Launch Control is only available when the following
procedure is followed:
NOTE: Pushing the SRT button on the Select-Track switch or
pressing the “Apps” button on the touchscreen are the two
options to access launch control features. Please refer to “SRT
Drive Modes” in “Multimedia” for further information.
1. Press the “Race Options” button on the touchscreen or
push the LAUNCH button on the Select-Track switch.
2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on the touchscreen. This screen will allow you to adjust your launch
RPM’s for optimum launch/traction.
3. Press the “Activate Launch Control” button on the
touchscreen, follow instructions in the instrument cluster display.
• Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
• Put vehicle in first gear.
• Steering wheel must be pointing straight.
• Vehicle must be on level ground.
• Apply Brake Pressure.
• While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator
pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed will
hold at the RPM that was set in the “Launch RPM
Set-up” screen.
NOTE: Messages will appear in the instrument cluster
display to inform the driver if one or more of the above
conditions have not been met.
6
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. When the above conditions have been met, the instrument cluster display will read “Release Brake”.
5. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches
62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system will return to its current ESC mode.
Launch control will abort before launch completion, display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster under any the
following conditions:
• The accelerator pedal is released during launch.
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
moving in a straight line.
Guidelines For Track Use
NOTE: Because of the extreme conditions encountered
during track use, any damage or wear associated with
track use may not be covered by warranty.
• If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes they
will alter the vehicle’s performance in various driving
situations. It is recommended that your vehicle operates
in SPORT or TRACK modes during the track event.
• Prior to each track event/day, verify all fluids are at the
correct levels. Refer to “Fluid Capacities” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
• The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change the system
to another mode.
• Prior to each track event, verify the front and rear brake
pads have more than ½ pad thickness remaining. If the
brake pads require changing, please burnish prior to
track outing at full pace.
NOTE: After launch control has been aborted, ESC will
return to its current ESC mode.
NOTE: Use of DOT 4 brake fluid is suggested for extended
track usage due to increased thermal capacity.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are
spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the
transmission may occur.
• At the conclusion of each track event, it is recommended
that a brake bleed procedure is performed to maintain
the pedal feel and stopping capability of your Brembo
High Performance brake system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
• It is recommended that each track outing should end
with a minimum of 1 cool down lap using minimal
braking.
• If equipped with a removable lower front fascia grille, it
is recommended to remove it for track use during
warm/hot weather to improve cooling airflow to critical
powertrain and cooling system components.
• All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of endurance, however, it is recommended that suspension system, brake system, prop shaft, and ½ shaft boots should
be checked for wear or damage after every track event.
• Track usage results in increased operating temperatures
of the engine, transmission, driveline and brake system.
This may affect noise (NVH) countermeasures designed
into your vehicle. New components may need to be
installed to return the system to the original NVH
performance.
• Tire pressure:
• 40 psi (276 kpa) hot, recommend 32 psi (221 kpa) front,
30 psi (207 kpa) rear cold
NOTE: It is recommended that you target 40 psi (276 kpa)
Hot Tire Pressure at the conclusion of each track session.
Starting at 32 psi (221 kpa) Front & 30 psi (207 kpa) Rear
Cold and adjusting based on ambient & track conditions is
recommended. Tire pressure can be monitored via the
instrument cluster display and can assist with adjustments.
Track burnishing your brakes:
To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the brake
pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for factory
installed components or when new brake friction components are installed:
1. Use one track session to burnish brakes by driving at
75% speed. Brake at approximately 0.60-0.80g max without ABS intervention.
2. Lap the track in this manner until you start smelling the
brakes. Continue for another ½ lap at speed, then do a
two lap cool down with minimal brake applies. Make
sure the brakes are not smoking. If they are, do another
cool down lap.
6
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Do not continue for more than 1 full burnishing lap after
you start smelling the brakes. Do not get them smoking
heavily. This will get them too hot and affect their life
negatively in future track use.
4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for at least
30 min. If an infrared thermal gun is available, allow
rotors to cool to 200°F (93.3°C) before going back out.
8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be replaced.
Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended, as it
removes mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal
capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek, making
it less robust and increasing the likelihood of pulsation
in further track use.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED
5. There should be a thin, ash layer when inspecting the
pads installed in the caliper. Having the ash layer go
more than half the thickness of the pad material indicates too aggressive of a burnish.
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required.
6. Sometimes, a second burnish session is required. If the
pads start smelling in the next track session, reduce
speed and braking decel to burnish targets and follow
step 2-4.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
7. New pads installed on old rotors still need to be
burnished. New rotors installed with old pads should be
burnished at the track or street driven for 300 city miles
to develop an adequate lining transfer layer on the rotor
surface prior to track use.
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it
from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer
the vehicle manually.
POWER STEERING
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer Programmable Features” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF –
SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within
the instrument cluster display, this indicates the vehicle
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to
“Warning Lights And Messages” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
6
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the instrument cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is on. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time.
“CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
OFF when you are not using it.
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate
at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set, a message
“CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear
indicating what speed was set. A cruise indicator lamp,
along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the
instrument cluster when the speed is set.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
To Vary The Speed Setting
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Increase Speed
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
6
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition switch
OFF erases the set speed from memory.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
WARNING!
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Control function performs differently. Please refer to the
proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
this section.
NOTE: Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always
confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
(Continued)
6
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse
sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for
approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the
target vehicle does not start moving within 3 minutes the parking brake will be activated, and the
ACC system will be cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — Distance Setting Increase
6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Setting Decrease
8 — CANC/Cancel
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
6
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver’s door is open at low speeds.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
• ESC Full-Off Mode is active.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
displays “ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
To Cancel
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will display the set speed.
The following conditions cancel the system:
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph
(32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not,
the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the
instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed
will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
6
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if:
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that
is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Resume
To Vary The Speed Setting
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The instrument cluster display will display the last
set speed.
To Increase Speed
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake force
will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply the
brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Decrease Speed
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
6
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
• When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming
to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
6
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless
of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the instrument cluster displays the “Sensed Vehicle
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while
following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
Brake Alert
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action and does
not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A
cancel message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention
will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the
instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects
(Continued)
6
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is located
in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read “ACC
SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer to
“Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor
lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the
sensor lens.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
6
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended.
Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW
operation.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an inter-
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
nal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
6
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving Condition Example
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
Turns And Bends
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example
Turn Or Bend Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
Lane Changing
Narrow Vehicles
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
6
Narrow Vehicle Example
Lane Changing Example
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising
at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise
Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
To change between the different control modes, push the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.
Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”
will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will
turn on when the system is turned on via the on/off
control. It turns green when the cruise control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will
sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
6
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Decrease Speed
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
U.S. Speed (mph)
• The CANC button is pushed.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped with an
Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released when performing a reverse
parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision
with an obstacle.
To Turn Off
NOTE:
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
To Resume Speed
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory
if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
• The driver can override the automatic braking function
by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via
ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the automatic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding
with a detected obstacle.
6
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the
vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear within the instrument
cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state for
the automatic braking function through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation
of the obstacle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer
to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has been
detected, the warning display will turn on indicating the
system status.
6
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or
right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
Slow Tone
Single 1/2 Second Tone
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
6
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Rear
Distance
(inches/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
Arcs-Left
Greater
than
79 inches
(200 cm)
None
79-59 inches
(200-150
cm)
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 inches 47-39 inches
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Continuous
None
Single 1/2
Second
Tone
None
None
None
None
Arcs-Center
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
Arcs-Right
None
None
None
None
3rd
Flashing
None
Radio
Volume
Reduced
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
6
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the
Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect
System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
The factory default volume setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster will display
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument
cluster display will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display”. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will display the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
6
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the
open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. An open
liftgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or
front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your
vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, the
vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released
when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function
by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via
ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the automatic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding
with a detected obstacle.
• The automatic braking function will not be available if
vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the
vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
6
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these
gear selector positions, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. A display warning will appear in the
instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle is above
ParkSense operating speed. The system will become active
again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation
of the obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer
to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Display
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
6
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to the
vehicle.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
Slow Tone
Single 1/2 Second Tone
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
6
Slow Tone For Rear Only
Fast Tone For Rear Only
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument
cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a
continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning
alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Rear
Distance
(inches/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
Arcs-Left
Greater
than
79 inches
(200 cm)
None
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches
(200-150
(150-120
(120-100
(100-65 cm)
cm)
cm)
cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Continuous
None
Single 1/2
Second
Tone
None
None
None
None
Arcs-Center
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
Arcs-Right
None
None
None
None
3rd
Flashing
None
Radio
Volume
Reduced
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Yes
6
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
47-39 inches
39-25 inches
(120-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47
inches (120 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs-Left
Arcs-Center
Arcs-Right
Radio Volume
Reduced
None
None
None
Fast
Less than 12
inches
(30 cm)
Continuous
None
None
None
No
None
4th Solid
None
No
None
3rd Flashing
None
No
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Yes
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an obstacle
has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal
is applied.
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from
the Uconnect System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
The factory default volume setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch.
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will
display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ pop up message for five seconds. After five
seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location
depending on where the fault is detected. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙,
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
messages if an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster will display
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument
cluster display will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE: When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector is
moved to the DRIVE position, no warning message will be
displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be on.
6
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see your
authorized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see your
authorized dealer.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
NOTE:
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and a
soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or
poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the
open position. An opened liftgate could provide a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
(Continued)
6
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking
maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space, providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver maintains
control of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver selection, the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking
space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver touches
the steering wheel after being instructed to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel,
and the driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if
searching for a parking space that has surfaces that will
absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
• New vehicles from the dealership must have at least
30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accurately. This is due to the system’s dynamic
vehicle calibration to improve the performance of the
feature. The system will also continuously perform the
dynamic vehicle calibration to account for differences
such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled
and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
• The parking maneuver is completed.
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space.
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space.
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering guidance into the parking space.
• Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist switch.
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch Location
• Driver’s door is opened.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns on).
• Rear liftgate is opened.
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns
off).
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
6
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate
and search for a parking space when the following conditions are present:
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display
• ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to Switch to
Perpendicular” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. You may switch to perpendicular parking if
you desire. Push the OK button on the left side steering
wheel switch to change your parking space setting.
• Driver’s door is closed.
NOTE:
• Gear position is in DRIVE.
• Ignition is in the RUN position.
• Rear liftgate is closed.
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven
above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will
cancel. The driver must then reactivate the system by
pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
• The outer surface and the underside of the front and rear
fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, mud,
dirt or other obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn off if any of the above conditions are not present.
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
sequence.
6
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Active ParkSense Searching
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel.
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
gear selector into the REVERSE position.
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
Space Found — Shift To Reverse
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
6
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
NOTE:
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them
to slow down. The driver is then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
6
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
6
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When the
maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK.
The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position⬙
message will be momentarily displayed.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled,
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to Switch to
Perpendicular” message will show in the instrument cluster display. Push the OK button on the left side steering
wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a
perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to parallel
parking if you desire.
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to
Switch to Parallel” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
6
Active ParkSense Searching Display
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular parking
sequence.
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel.
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
gear selector into the REVERSE position.
6
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
Space Found — Shift To Reverse
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
NOTE:
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them
to slow down. The driver is then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
6
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
6
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed
to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is
satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK.
The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position⬙
message will be momentarily displayed.
6
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up and moving
forward. You are responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system,
it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do
so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to
the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect
lane markings and measure vehicle position within the
lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane,
the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through
the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the
driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the
steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does
not return their hands to the wheel.
6
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is off. The LED in LaneSense button will illuminated while the system is deactivated.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below
the Uconnect display.
LaneSense On Message
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once (LED turns on).
LaneSense Warning Button
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
LaneSense Warning Message
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has been
detected and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line
remains solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale changes
from solid white to flashing yellow.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
6
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is
solid green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is on to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin
line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque
is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction
of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of
the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control, forward collision warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along
with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across
6
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of
the vehicle above the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned on), the rear view image with dynamic grid
lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or
the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. A
dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver. Different colored zones indicate the distance to the
rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable
to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
6
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Rear Camera — Viewing At Speed
When the vehicle is in park, neutral or drive, the Rear View
Camera can be activated with the “Rear View Camera”
in the Controls menu. This feature allows the
button
customer to monitor the area directly behind the vehicle
(or trailer, if equipped) for up to ten seconds while at
speed. If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the “X” button on the touchscreen.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
• Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors.
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper doors to allow
emergency refueling with a gas can.
• Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
Fuel Filler Door Latch
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door
using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the nozzle
opens and holds the flapper doors while refueling.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle “clicks”
or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
• Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
• Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors open.
• Pour fuel into funnel opening.
• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to putting
back in the spare tire storage area.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being
filled.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the
release cable back to the home position to re-seat the fuel
door latch to the closed position.
6
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to the
center, this will pop up the outboard edge.
Release Cable
NOTE: If the fuel door does not latch after the manual
release cable has been activated, the actuator latch should
be manually returned to the closed position.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Certification Label
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs,
tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability
does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Rim Size
Payload
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
6
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly.
Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This
includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other
connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the
most popular on the market today and they are commonly
used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
6
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) — SRT
GCWR (Gross ComFrontal Area
bined Wt. Rating)
6.4L Automatic
12,600 lbs (5 715 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Engine/Transmission
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
7,200 lbs (3 265 kg)
Max. Trailer Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
720 lbs (327 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
NOTE:
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.
NOTE: Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot of the
locking retainer if needed for added leverage.
• The manufacturer does not recommend using the run
flat feature while driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or towing a trailer.
6
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch receiver
cover, this must be removed to access the trailer hitch
receiver (if equipped). This hitch receiver cover is located
at the bottom center of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of
the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainer
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you).
Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
Hitch Receiver Cover
3. Lower back down to disengage the tabs located at the
top of the hitch receiver cover and then pull outwards to
remove.
To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after towing repeat the
procedure in reverse order.
NOTE: Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver cover
in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
CAUTION!
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
6
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals. When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or
ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
Towing Requirements — Tires
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire
inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
6
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, select TOW mode, or use the AutoStick
shift control to manually select a lower gear.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
TOW Mode
To reduce the potential for automatic transmission overheating, select TOW mode when driving in hilly areas, or
select a lower gear (using the AutoStick shift paddles) on
more severe grades.
NOTE: Using TOW mode, or selecting a lower gear (using
the AutoStick shift control) while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
6
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
AutoStick
City Driving
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Recreational towing is not allowed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with any of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
DRIVING TIPS
Traction
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be
observed:
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
6
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
(Continued)
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
䡵 ASSIST AND 9–1–1 MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED . . .364
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
䡵 JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Preparations For Jump Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
䡵 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . .382
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Run Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . .398
7
364 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
ASSIST AND 9–1–1 MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch
bank just above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
Assist And 9–1–1 Mirror
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
9-1-1 button.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may discharge the battery.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 365
NOTE:
9-1-1 Call
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable
if your Uconnect Access service is active and you are
connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support for
Uconnect Access.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other vehicle
issues.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system
initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call
connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview
Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
7
366 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1
operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system will attempt to remain connected with the
9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the
connection.
(Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 367
WARNING! (Continued)
can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
7
368 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X (voice/
data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent
1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data)
network connection and a GPS signal is required for the
9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 369
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Glove Compartment
Lamp
Grab Handle Lamp
Overhead Console
Reading Lamps
Rear Cargo Lamp
Visor Vanity Lamp
Bulb Number
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
214–2
V26377
Underpanel Courtesy
Lamps
Instrument Cluster
(General Illumination)
Telltale/Hazard Lamp
Bulb Number
906
103
74
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps (Low Beam)
Premium Headlamps
(Low/High Beam)
Headlamps (High Beam)
Premium Park/Turn
Signal Lamp
Premium Daytime
Running Lamp (DRL)
Front Fog Lamps
Front Side Marker
Premium Front Side
Marker — If Equipped
Bulb Number
H11
D3S (Serviced At
Authorized Dealer)
9005
LED - (Service At
Authorized Dealer)
LED - (Service At
Authorized Dealer)
H11
W5W
LED - (Service At
Authorized Dealer)
7
370 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Rear Body Side Turn
Signal Lamps
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail
Lamps
Liftgate Backup Lamps
Rear License Lamps
Rear Body Side Stop
Lamps
Rear Body Side Tail
Lamps
CHMSL - Center High
Mounted Stop Lamp
Bulb Number
7444NA (WY27/8W)
7440NA (WY21W)
LED - (Service At
Authorized Dealer)
921 (W16W)
LED - (Service At
Authorized Dealer)
3157KRD LCP
LED - (Service At
Authorized Dealer)
LED - (Service At
Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
Bulb Replacement
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) —
If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of this,
you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are turned
on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the
system charges.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 371
Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp connector.
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze
them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the
front fog lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the
housing.
CAUTION!
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
(Continued)
7
372 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat
and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp
wiring.
Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with the
slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back of the
front fog lamp housing.
5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are
engaged in the slots of the collar.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp
housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are
fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp
connector.
Tail Lamp Push Pins
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from lamp.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 373
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
7
Rear Of Tail Lamp
1 — Rear Turn/Stop Bulb Socket
2 — LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
3 — Backup Bulb Socket
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a suitable tool to pry the lower trim from the
liftgate.
374 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Liftgate Lower Trim
3. Continue removing the trim.
4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter
clockwise.
Rear Of Liftgate Tail Lamp
1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
2 — Backup Bulb Socket
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
7. Reinstall the socket(s).
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 375
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high mounted stop lamp is an LED. Service at
an authorized dealer.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
Rear License Lamp
The rear license lamps are LEDs. See your authorized
dealer for service.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice
versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
376 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element.
3 — Blade fuse with a NOT functional / BAD fuse element (blown
fuse).
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the
following chart.
Power Distribution Center
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 377
Cavity
F03
F05
F06
F07
F09
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
Micro Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F17
F19
F20
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F28
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Radiator Fan
Compressor for Air Suspension — If Equipped
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump
Starter Solenoid
Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Brake
Vacuum Pump
Body Controller/Exterior Lighting #2
Trailer Tow Electric Brake — If Equipped
Body Controller #3/Power Locks
Blower Motor Front
Body Controller #4/Exterior Lighting #1
Headlamp Washer — If Equipped
Headrest Solenoid — If Equipped
Passenger Door Module
Engine Control Module
Interior Lights #1
Driver Door Module
Front Wipers
Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module/Valves
Trailer Tow Backup Lights — If Equipped
7
378 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F29
F30
F32
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
F40
F42
F44
F49
F50
Cartridge Fuse
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
25 Amp Clear
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
F51
–
15 Amp Blue
F52
F53
F56
–
–
–
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
Description
Trailer Tow Parking Lights — If Equipped
Trailer Tow Receptacle — If Equipped
Drive Train Control Module
Slip Differential Control
Sunroof – If Equipped
Rear Defroster
Rear Blower Motor — If Equipped
Power Inverter 115V AC — If Equipped
VISM #1/Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Leveling
Horn
Diagnostic Port
Integrated Central Stack/Climate Control
Air Suspension Module/Electronic Limited Slip
Differentials — If Equipped
Ignition Node Module/Keyless Ignition/Steering
Column Lock
Battery Sensor
Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights — If Equipped
Additional Content (Diesel engine only)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 379
Cavity
F57
F58
F59
F60
F61
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
F62
F63
F64
F66
F67
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
25 Amp Clear
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
F68
F69
F70
F71
F72
F73
F75
F76
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Green
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Description
NOX Sensor
HID Headlamps LH — If Equipped
Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)
Transmission Control Module
Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor
(Diesel engine only)
Air Conditioning Clutch
Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)
Fuel Injectors/Powertrain
Sunroof/Passenger Window Switches/Rain Sensor
CD/DVD/Bluetooth Hands-free Module —
If Equipped
Rear Wiper Motor
Spotlight Feed — If Equipped
Fuel Pump Motor
Audio Amplifier
PCM — If Equipped
HID Headlamp RH — If Equipped
Dual Batt Control — If Equipped
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
7
380 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F77
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
F78
F80
–
–
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F81
F82
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F83
F84
F85
F86
F87
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F88
F90/F91
F92
F93
F94
F95
–
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Description
Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle
Disconnect Module
Engine Control Module/Electric Power Steering
Universal Garage Door Opener/Compass/AntiIntrusion Module
Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
Steering Column Control Module/Cruise
Control/DTV
Fuel Door
Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
Airbag Module
Airbag Module
Air Suspension — If Equipped/Trailer
Tow/Steering Column Control Module
Instrument Panel Cluster
Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable
Rear Console Lamp — If Equipped
Cigar Lighter
Shifter/Transfer Case Module
Rear Camera/ParkSense
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 381
Cavity
F96
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
F97
–
20 Amp Yellow
F98
F99
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F100
F101
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
F103
F104
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Rear Seat Heater Switch/Flashlamp Charger —
If Equipped
Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped
Front Heated Seats/Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Climate Control/Driver Assistance Systems
Module/DSRC
Active Damping — If Equipped
Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High Beams —
If Equipped
Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear HVAC
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center Console)
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
(Continued)
7
382 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Run Flat Tires
This vehicle is equipped with “run flat” tires. Run flat tires
allow the vehicle to be driven approximately 50 miles
(80km) at 55 mph (88km/h). Tire service should be obtained to avoid prolonged run flat feature usage.
WARNING!
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” is illuminated. Vehicle handling and braking may be reduced. You could have a
collision and be severely or fatally injured.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located in
the rear cargo area, below the load floor.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 383
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear cargo
area and is secured to the body with a special wing nut.
Preparations For Jacking
CAUTION!
Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct jacking
points. Failure to follow this information could cause
damage to the vehicle or underbody components.
Jack Storage Location
NOTE: The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located
on top of the spare tire. If your vehicle is out of fuel and an
auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into the filler
neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. For vehicles not
equipped with a spare tire, the fuel filler funnel is stored in
the left storage bin under the load floor. For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System, refer to “Refueling The
Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating” in this manual.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
7
384 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
WARNING! (Continued)
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position.
For example, if changing the right front
tire, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being jacked.
7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift, refer to “QuadraLift — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information on disabling automatic leveling.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
(Continued)
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the transmission
in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 385
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is still
on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
7
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Jack And Tool Assembly
386 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jacking Locations
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange just
behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular lift
point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 387
CAUTION!
Do NOT raise the vehicle by the body side sill molding. Be sure the jack is placed in the proper engagement location on the inside of the panel. Damage of the
vehicle may occur if the procedure is not properly
followed.
7
Front Jacking Location
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
388 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with the
valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Rear Jacking Location
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 389
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For correct lug nut
torque, refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications”. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return it
and the tools to the proper positions in the foam tray.
12. Remove the small center cap and securely store the
road wheel in the cargo area.
7
Stowed Spare
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
soon as possible, properly secure the spare tire with the
special wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m), reinstall
the jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the rear load
floor cover.
NOTE: Do not drive with the spare tire installed for more
than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
390 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of
the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications” for proper lug nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 391
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger’s
front seat. There are remote terminals located under the
hood to assist in jump starting.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do not
touch each other, or either vehicle, until properly connected for jump starting.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove it.
7
392 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle while
making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 393
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2000 rpm
since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel and
can damage booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested at
your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located in the
spare tire storage area. If your vehicle is out of fuel and an
auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into the filler
neck and proceed to fill the vehicle.
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer to
“Refueling The Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating” in
this manual.
7
394 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park Release. In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s
seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the
Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake, or by
proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the
Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could
lead to serious injury or death for those in or around
the vehicle.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park
Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away
from the console hinges.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a
Manual Park Release is available.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal latch
in towards the tether strap.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 395
7
Release Latch
4. While the metal latch is in the open position, simultaneously pull upwards on the tether strap until the lever
clicks and latches in the released position. The transmission is now out of PARK and the vehicle can be moved.
Released Position
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is
activated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally,
firmly apply the parking brake.
396 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release, apply tension
upward while pushing the release latch towards the
tether to unlock the lever.
Stowed Position
NOTE: Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back in
place.
Release Latch
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has
been unlocked, be sure it is stowed properly and locks
into position.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 397
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE
while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙
mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control” in “Safety” for further information. Once
the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again
to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel,
no matter what the speed.
7
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rockingmotion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
(Continued)
398 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all
four wheels off the ground using a flatbed.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for loading onto a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle using any other method can cause
severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.
• Damage from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Maintenance Plan – SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ Checking Oil Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
䡵 TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
8
400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents . . . . . . . .459
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .460
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Preserving The Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
䡵 BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
䡵 INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Leather Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Glass Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401
SCHEDULED SERVICING
NOTE:
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual
must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect
your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be
needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as
dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and
service should also be done anytime a malfunction is
suspected.
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil
if it has been six months since your last oil change, even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
The Instrument Cluster Display will display an “Oil
Change Required” message and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever
comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section for further information.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.
8
402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Once A Month
At Each Oil Change
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, engine oil,
brake master cylinder, and add as needed.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
150,000
42,000
30
70,000
144,000
36,000
24
60,000
138,000
30,000
18
50,000
132,000
24,000
12
40,000
126,000
18,000
6
30,000
120,000
12,000
Or Months:
20,000
114,000
6,000
108,000
Miles:
10,000
102,000
Maintenance Plan – SRT
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before scheduled maintenance.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
150,000
96,000
90
If using your vehicle for any of
the following: dusty or off-road
conditions. Inspect the engine air
cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings; replace
if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the CV joints.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the exhaust system.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
250,000
90,000
84
80,000
144,000
84,000
78
240,000
78,000
72
70,000
138,000
72,000
66
230,000
66,000
60
60,000
132,000
60,000
54
220,000
54,000
48
50,000
126,000
48,000
42
210,000
42,000
36
40,000
120,000
36,000
30
200,000
30,000
24
30,000
114,000
24,000
18
190,000
18,000
12
20,000
108,000
12,000
6
180,000
6,000
Or Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
102,000
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403
8
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel
disc brakes.
X
X
X
X
X
Drain the transfer case and refill.
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the accessory drive belts
replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid. Change if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, sustained high
speed driving, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
150,000
96,000
90
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and boot seals, for cracks
or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or
end play; replace if necessary.
X
X
Replace the engine air cleaner
filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect and replace the PCV
Valve if necessary
Replace the spark plugs. **
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 120 months if not
done at 150,000 miles
(240,000 km).
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
Monthly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
250,000
90,000
84
80,000
144,000
84,000
78
240,000
78,000
72
70,000
138,000
72,000
66
230,000
66,000
60
60,000
132,000
60,000
54
220,000
54,000
48
50,000
126,000
48,000
42
210,000
42,000
36
40,000
120,000
36,000
30
200,000
30,000
24
30,000
114,000
24,000
18
190,000
18,000
12
20,000
108,000
12,000
6
180,000
6,000
Or Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
102,000
404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
X
X
X
X
X
X
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
6.4L Engine
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick.
Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom
of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the
safe zone on these engines.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear
window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is located in
the engine compartment, be sure to check the fluid level at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the
washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it
to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this
will help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your
windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Adding Washer Fluid
The instrument cluster display will indicate when the washer
fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low fluid level,
the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
8
408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra
0W-40 engine or equivalent Mopar oil meeting the FCA
Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine
oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section for further information.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Engine Oil Viscosity
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Use Pennzoil Ultra Platinum 0W-40 engine or equivalent
Mopar oil meeting the FCA Material Standard MS-12633
for use in all operating temperatures.
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 411
Engine Oil Filter
WARNING! (Continued)
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
(Continued)
near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Gasoline Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you
find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change
your air cleaner filter.
8
412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.
1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover.
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose
3 — Spring Clips
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 413
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to
the housing assembly.
8
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
(Continued)
414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard
or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected
for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable
and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information
Book, for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a —
If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417
NOTE: When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compartment door and lifting the clip out of glove compartment
door.
Glove Compartment
8
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on both sides
of the glove compartment door, partially close the glove
compartment door and push inward to release the glove
compartment travel stop on one side and repeat this
procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment door
toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the glove
compartment door from its hinges.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
418 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining tab
and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to the
HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by pulling
the door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on the right
side to fully remove the cover.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the glove
compartment door hinge and reattach the glove compartment tension tether by inserting the tether clip in the
glove compartment and sliding the clip away from the
face of the glove compartment door.
A/C Air Filter Cover
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
9. Push the door to the near closed position to reengage the
glove compartment travel stops.
NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 419
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:
• Wear Or Uneven Edges
• Foreign Material
• Hardening Or Cracking
• Deformation Or Fatigue
8
420 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding
the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade
down towards the base of the wiper arm.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 421
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the
wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade
toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper
blade from the wiper arm).
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
8
422 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
in the full up position.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the blade
side of the wiper facing up and away from the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm
and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against the
wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and snap it
into its locked position. Latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to
allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 423
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move
the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm
to disengage.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
8
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm
with your right hand. With your left hand hold the
wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper
blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the
wiper arm.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Arm Receptacle
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
424 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to
allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the
end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper
arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade flush
with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 425
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
8
426 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan motor lead
before working near the radiator cooling fan.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the
OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
(Continued)
If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized
dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face
of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 427
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
8
428 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer
for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact your local
authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 429
Cooling System Pressure Cap
Disposal Of Used Coolant
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
See your authorized dealer for service
8
430 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high
brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 431
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to
bring level within the designated marks on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the
top of the master cylinder area before removing cap. With
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads
are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low, check the
system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
8
432 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Automatic Transmission
Special Additives
Selection Of Lubricant
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check
your transmission fluid level using special service tools.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 433
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
8
434 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
Transfer Case
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Fluid Level Check
Selection Of Lubricant
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should be
inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 435
RAISING THE VEHICLE
Tire Markings
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
your authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
8
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
436 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 437
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
8
438 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 439
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
8
440 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 441
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
8
442 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 443
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
8
444 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 445
Tires — General Information
WARNING! (Continued)
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
8
446 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fuel Economy
CAUTION!
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
judgement when determining proper
may look properly inflated even when
inflated.
a good quality
make a visual
inflation. Tires
they are under-
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 447
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
8
448 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Spinning
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 449
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
8
450 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 451
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure
adversely affect the safety and handling of
designation or
sidewall. Use
to do so may
your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
8
452 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Snow Tires
Spare Tires — If Equipped
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 453
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
WARNING! (Continued)
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You
can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare
tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
(Continued)
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
8
454 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 455
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
8
456 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, RUD-GRIP 4X4 or Equivalent
is recommended on 295/45R20 tires.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 457
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
8
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Tire Rotation
458 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 459
corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize
the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
8
460 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
Preserving The Bodywork
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Washing
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
CAUTION!
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 461
Special Care
INTERIORS
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
Seats And Fabric Parts
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
8
462 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 463
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 IDENTIFICATION DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . .471
▫ Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . . .471
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .468
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
9
466 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
label located on the left front corner of the instrument panel
pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also is stamped on the right front floor,
behind the right front seat. Move the right front seat
forward to allow better viewing of the stamped VIN. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save
this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
VIN Location
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 467
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the “Brake System Warning Light.”
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes
will still function. However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required with the
power system operating.
NOTE: Due to the performance nature of our brake systems, some noise is to be expected.
9
468 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
110 Ft-Lbs (149 N·m)
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
22 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half
way).
NOTE: If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or
service station.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 469
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
6.4L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emission regulations, provide optimal fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded “Premium” gasoline having a posted octane number of
91 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of 91 or higher octane “Premium” gasoline is required for in this engine.
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
9
470 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a
list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15%
ethanol (E-15).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 471
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
9
472 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 473
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified, MS-12633)
Cooling System*
6.4 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
24.6 Gallons
Metric
93.0 Liters
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
16 Quarts
15.5 Liters
9
474 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that
meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent
Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633
for use in all operating temperatures.
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher, 0-15% Ethanol.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 475
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case – Single-Speed
(Selec-Track)
Axle Differential (Front)
Axle Differential (Rear) – With
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential
(ELSD)
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with
integrated friction modifier.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used.
If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
9
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Custom Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
䡵 RACE OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
䡵 CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Launch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
䡵 SRT PERFORMANCE PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Timers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
䡵 SRT DRIVE MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Track Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Tow Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Snow Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Gauges 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Gauges 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ G-Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
䡵 VALET MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
䡵 ECO MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
10
478 MULTIMEDIA
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Accessibility — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .524
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .540
䡵 UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
(RSE) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Blu-ray Disc Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The
Touchscreen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System. . .531
▫ Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
MULTIMEDIA
479
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
▫ Register (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
▫ Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .559
▫ Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV). . . . . . . . . .554
10
480 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT RADIOS
1. Press the “Apps
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The new shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on
the main menu bar.
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
” button to open the App screen.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main Menu
MULTIMEDIA
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
481
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices - If
Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 Radio” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
10
482 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS
Buttons On The Faceplate
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument
panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a setting
(i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have screen off and back
buttons located below the Uconnect system.
Push the screen off button to turn off the Uconnect touchscreen. Push the screen off button a second time to turn the
touchscreen on.
Push the back button to exit out of a menu or certain option
on the Uconnect system.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Buttons On Faceplate And Buttons
On Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
display.
MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 8.4
Settings
Press the “Apps
” button, then press the “Settings”
button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to
access programmable features that may be equipped
such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort,
Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM
Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data, and System Information.
483
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the “Back” Arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
“Up” or “Down” Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may
vary.
10
484 MULTIMEDIA
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Display Mode
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
Selectable Options
Manual
+
Auto
-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With
+
Headlights OFF
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme
NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection,
press the ⬙Set Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark
appears showing that the setting has been selected.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Set Language
485
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for
all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Keyboard
Smart Keyboard Selection
Latin Keyboard
NOTE:
Latin Keyboard displays different keyboard layouts to choose from. The selectable keyboards are ABCDEF Keyboard,
QWERTY Keyboard, and AZERTY Keyboard.
Touchscreen Beep
Control Screen Time-Out —
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before
the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
10
486 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the
instrument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in
Cluster
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Units
US
Selectable Options
Metric
Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption”
[MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C, or °F), “Power”
[HP (US), HP (UK), or kW], and “Torque” (lb-ft, or Nm) units of measure independently.
MULTIMEDIA
487
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
Selectable Options
Brief
Always
Detailed
With Help
Never
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Sync Time With GPS
Set Time Hours
Selectable Options
+
-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
10
488 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Set Time Minutes
Selectable Options
+
-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format
12hrs
24hrs
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay — If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guide Lines —
If Equipped
489
Selectable Options
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Forward Collision
On
Warning Only
Warning & Braking
Warning — If Equipped
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Warning includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when
the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Sound Only” option is
selected a chime will sound alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Sound and Brake” option is selected, it will apply the brakes to slow your vehicle in case
of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
10
490 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Forward Collision
Warning Sensitivity —
If Equipped
Far
Selectable Options
Med
Near
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle
directly in front of you needs to be at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly
in front of you, based on the option is selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas
“Near” will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
ParkSense — If Equipped
Sound Only
Sound and Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in
REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with “Sound Only,” or “Sound and Display.”
Rear ParkSense Chime
Low
Medium
High
Volume
Front ParkSense Chime
Low
Medium
High
Volume
Rear ParkSense Braking
Assist — If Equipped
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
491
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the park assist system will detect objects located
behind the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
LaneSense Warning
Early
Medium
Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense” setting determines at what distance the system will warn you, through steering wheel feedback,
of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength —
Low
Medium
High
If Equipped
Blind Spot Alert —
Off
Lights
Lights and Chime
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert system is activated and will show a visual alert
in the outside mirrors, or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert when the
turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Alert system is deactivated. If your vehicle has experienced
any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will
result in the Blind Spot Alert System not operating to specification.
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
10
492 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec
Selectable Options
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlight Illuminated On
0 sec
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
Approach
Headlights With Wipers —
If Equipped
Auto Dim High Beams —
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights —
If Equipped
Flash Lights With Lock
MULTIMEDIA
493
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Door Locks
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed
of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
Sound Horn With Lock
Sound Horn With Remote Start
Off
1st Press
2nd Press
10
494 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Driver Door
Selectable Options
All Doors
NOTE:
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first press
of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When ⬙All
Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button.
If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry
equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will
unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the
driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob —
If Equipped
NOTE:
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Power Lift Gate Alert — If Equipped
MULTIMEDIA
495
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated
Seat & Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start — If Equipped
Off
Selectable Options
Remote Start
All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn ON.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Balance/Fade
10
Selectable Options
Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon”
toward any location in the box.
496 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Equalizer
Bass
Selectable Options
Mid
Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Off
1
2
3
Surround Sound — If Equipped
On
Off
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
+
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
AutoPlay
NOTE:
The “AutoPlay” setting, when activated, automatically starts playing music off of a connect device as soon as it is
connected.
MULTIMEDIA
497
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Do Not Disturb
Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb Options
NOTE:
The “Do Not Distrub” feature allows the paired phone to send a predetermined call, text or both, to any incoming
call, or text, before sending it directly to voicemail. It also keep a counter of all missed calls and texts while on the
road.
Paired Phones
List Of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Paired Audio Sources
List Of Paired Audio Sources
NOTE:
This feature shows which Audio Sources are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to
the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Display Phone Info In Cluster
Off
On
10
498 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
SXM Tune Start
Selectable Options
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using
one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you
will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip
List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info
Sirius ID
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
499
Selectable Options
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Accessibility — If Equipped
After pressing the “Accessibility” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Accessibility
10
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Accessibility” feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD/Blu-ray functions, when it is activated. For example, when activated, and the “Play” button is selected, the system will announce
“Play button selected”, and then once pressed again the “Play” button will perform its action.
500 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
MULTIMEDIA
501
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
System Information
Selectable Options
System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “System Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
10
502 MULTIMEDIA
havior desired. The Drive Modes feature is controlled
through the Selec-Track switch and may be accessed by
performing any of the following:
SRT DRIVE MODES
• Pushing the SRT button on the Selec-Track switch.
• Pushing the Custom button on the Selec-Track switch.
• Selecting “Drive Modes” from the “Apps” menu.
• Selecting “Drive Modes” from within the Performance
Pages menu.
Drive Modes
Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a Drive Modes feature
which allows for coordinating the operation of various
vehicle systems depending upon the type of driving be-
The SRT Drive Modes main screen displays the current
drive mode and real-time status of the vehicle’s performance configuration. The selectable Drive Modes are
Track, Sport, Auto, Snow, Tow or Custom. Information
shown will indicate the actual status of each system, along
with a vehicle graphic that displays the active drive mode
status. The color red indicates “Track,” orange “Sport,”
yellow “Street” and blue for “Snow.” These features will
reset to AUTO upon an ignition cycle. If the system status
shown does not match the current drive mode set up, a
message will be displayed indicating which values are not
matching the current mode.
MULTIMEDIA
Listed below are the available Drive Modes:
Track Mode
503
Selecting “Track” with the Selec-Track switch will activate
the configuration for typical track driving. The Transmission, Stability Control, All-Wheel Drive, Steering, and
Suspension systems are all set to their “Track” settings
highlighted in red. The Paddle Shifters are enabled.
NOTE: Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full-Off can be
activated by pushing and holding the ESC Off button on
the instrument panel switch bank for five seconds.
10
Drive Modes (Track)
504 MULTIMEDIA
Sport Mode
Tow Mode
Drive Modes (Sport)
Drive Modes (Tow)
Selecting “Sport” with the Selec-Track switch will activate
the configuration for typical enthusiast driving. The Transmission, Stability Control, All-Wheel Drive, Steering, and
Suspension systems are all set to their “Sport” settings
highlighted in orange. The Paddle Shifters are enabled.
Selecting “Tow” with the Selec-Track switch will activate
the configuration for towing a trailer. Once in this mode,
trailer sway control is enabled in the ESC system. The
Transmission is set to “Tow” setting highlighted in purple.
MULTIMEDIA
Stability Control is set to “Full” highlighted in blue.
All-Wheel Drive is set to “50/50” highlighted in blue.
Steering is set to “Street” highlighted in yellow. Suspension
is set to “Sport” highlighted in orange.
Snow Mode
505
Selecting “Snow” with the Selec-Track switch will activate
snow mode for use on loose traction surfaces. When in
Snow mode (depending on certain operating conditions),
the transmission may use second gear (rather than first
gear) during launches, to minimize wheel slippage. The
Transmission is set to “Snow” setting highlighted in blue.
Stability Control is set to “Full” highlighted in blue.
All-Wheel Drive is set to “50/50” highlighted in blue.
Steering is set to “Street” highlighted in yellow. Suspension
is set to “Street” highlighted in yellow.
10
Drive Mode (Snow)
506 MULTIMEDIA
Paddle shifters can be enabled or disabled by pressing the
“Snow Set-up” button on the touchscreen.
Snow Mode Set-Up
Auto Mode
Drive Mode Auto (Default)
Auto mode is enabled upon ignition on, or by selecting
“Auto” with the Selec-Track switch. The Transmission,
Stability Control and All-Wheel Drive modes are set to
MULTIMEDIA
their “Street” settings highlighted in yellow. Steering and
Suspension can be configured in either the “Street,”
“Sport,” or “Track” and the Paddle Shifters may be enabled
or disabled while in auto set-up mode.
507
Custom Mode
10
Custom Mode
Auto Mode (Default)
Custom Mode may be selected by pushing the “Custom”
button on Selec-Track switch. Custom Mode allows you to
create a custom configuration that is saved for quick
selection of your favorite settings. While in Custom Mode,
508 MULTIMEDIA
the All-Wheel Drive, Stability Control, Transmission, Steering, Suspension, and Paddle Shifter settings are shown in
their current configuration.
RACE OPTIONS
While in the Custom Mode screen, press the “Custom
Set-Up” button on the touchscreen to access the selectable
options. Select which mode suits your driving needs for a
custom driving experience.
Race Options
Custom Mode Set-Up
Press the “Race Options” button on the touchscreen while
in the Drive Modes screen, to display the vehicle’s Launch
Control screen. Within Race Options, you can activate,
deactivate, and adjust the RPM values for the Launch
Control and Shift Light features.
MULTIMEDIA
509
Launch Control
WARNING!
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be used
in a controlled environment, and within the limits of
the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by
the performance pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
Activate Launch Control
Launch Control can be accessed by pushing the Launch
button on the Selec-Track switch or pushing the SRT button
on the Selec-Track switch then selecting the “Race Options”
button on the touchscreen. Press the “Activate Launch
Control” button on the touchscreen to activate the feature.
Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” to set the holding RPM.
10
510 MULTIMEDIA
Launch Mode can be turned on or off by either pushing the
Launch Control button on the Selec-Track Switch, or by
pressing the “Cancel Launch Mode” button on the touchscreen.
To adjust the Launch RPM, drag the slider bar or press the
arrows on the touchscreen to adjust the holding RPM. The
launch RPM limit is between 1500 and 3500 RPM.
Shift Light
NOTE: Launch RPM Set-Up cannot be accessed unless
Launch Mode is deactivated.
Shift Light In Paddle Shift Mode
Launch RPM Set-Up
MULTIMEDIA
511
Your vehicle is equipped with a shift light feature that
illuminates the back lighting of the tachometer (in red)
within the instrument cluster display. This feature is a
visual cue to manually up-shift using the paddle shifters.
To actuate the Shift Light feature, press the “Shift Light”
button on the touchscreen, then press the “Shift Light On”
button on the touchscreen. Activation is shown on the
instrument cluster display. Pressing the “Shift Light RPM
Set-Up” button on the touchscreen will take you to the
Shift Light RPM Set-Up screen.
NOTE: You must be in Paddle Shift Mode, and the
electronic-shifter must be in the M position, in order to
activate the shift light. Refer to “Automatic Transmission”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Shift Light RPM Set-Up
The Shift Light RPM Set-Up allows you to set the shift light
to illuminate for gears 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5-8. Pressing and
releasing the up/down arrow buttons above and below
each listed gear, the RPM values will change in increments
of 250 RPM. Pressing and holding the arrows will change
the RPM values in increments of 500 RPM, ranging from
10
512 MULTIMEDIA
2000–6000 RPM. The Shift Light setup screen may only be
accessed if the feature is enabled, press the “Reset to
factory default” button on the touchscreen to change back
to factory settings, or press the “Shift Light Off” button on
the touchscreen to turn the system off completely.
SRT PERFORMANCE PAGES
Performance Pages is an application that provides a display for performance indicators, as received from the
instrument cluster, that will help you gain familiarity with
the capabilities of your SRT vehicle in real-time.
To access the SRT Performance Pages, press the “Apps”
button on the touchscreen, then press the “Performance
Pages” button on the touchscreen, or press “SRT Performance Pages” in the top left of the touchscreen while in
Drive Modes. Press the desired button on the touchscreen
to access that specific Performance Page.
WARNING! (Continued)
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the limits
of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
by the Performance Pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The Performance Pages include the following:
• Home
• Timers
• Gauges 1
• Gauges 2
• G-Force
• Engine
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the SRT Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
(Continued)
MULTIMEDIA
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Home
513
• A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll through
vehicle images.
• A short-cut to the SRT Drive Modes feature.
Timers
10
Performance Pages — Home
When Home is selected, the following options will be available:
• A series of six images which can be selected by the user.
Performance Pages — Timers
514 MULTIMEDIA
When the Timers Page is selected, you will be able to select
from the following “Tickets”:
• Recent
last saved run for Uconnect System storage, unless using a
USB or SD card which will continue to take save files until
full. The operation of the Save feature is listed below:
Pressing the “Recent” button displays a “real time” summary of performance timers.
• Last
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run of
performance timers.
• Best
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run
of performance timers, except for braking data.
• Save
Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the recent, last,
or best run depending on the ticket being viewed when
save is selected. Any saved run over ten, will overwrite the
Performance Pages — Save
• With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB” button
to save runs to the jump drive.
• With an SD Card installed, press the “SD Card” to save
runs to the SD Card.
MULTIMEDIA
• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the
Owner web page.
• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer “Ticket.”
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
• 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
100 mph (0 to 160 km/h).
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ Mile
(200 meters) and the speed of the vehicle when the ⅛ Mile
(200 meters) was reached.
• ¼ mile (400 meter)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile
(400 meters) and the speed of the vehicle when the ¼ mile
(400 meters) was reached.
515
• 60 ft time
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go 60 ft.
• Brake Distance
Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
stop. Contains current and last data for distance and start
– from speed.
NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a
complete stop.
• Brake Speed
Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the brake
pedal is depressed.
NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only display
⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30 MPH
(48 km/h).
10
516 MULTIMEDIA
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Gauges 1
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1
MULTIMEDIA
517
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Gauges 2
• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.
• Transmission Temperature
Shows the actual transmission temperature.
10
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2
518 MULTIMEDIA
When G-Force is selected, the following features will be
available:
G-Force
• Lateral G-Force Left and Right
The lateral g-force measures the (sideways) left and right
force of the vehicle.
• Longitudinal G-Force Acceleration and Braking
The longitudinal g-force measures the acceleration and
braking force of the vehicle.
• Peak G-Forces Acceleration and Braking, Left and Right
This shows the maximum g-forces that have been achieved
since the last reset from the instrument cluster display. Peak
values are maintained through ignition cycles by the instrument cluster display until they are cleared by the driver.
• Vehicle Speed
SRT Performance Pages — G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values
(two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as steering angle.
Vehicle Speed measures the current speed of the vehicle in
either mph or km/h, starting at zero with no maximum
value.
• Steering Wheel Angle
Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to zero.
MULTIMEDIA
519
The zero degree measurement indicates a steering wheel
straight ahead position. When the steering angle value is
negative, this indicates a turn to the left, and when the
steering angle value is positive, a turn to the right.
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Engine
• Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts
• Vehicle Speed
Shows the actual vehicle speed in mph or km/h.
Shows instantaneous engine power.
• Instantaneous Torque
Shows instantaneous engine torque in Foot Pounds (lb-ft).
• Oil Pressure
Shows actual oil pressure in Pounds per Square Inch (PSI)
or Kilopascals (kPa).
• Gear
Shows the current (or pending) operating transmission
gear of the vehicle.
SRT Performance Pages — Engine
10
520 MULTIMEDIA
While in Valet Mode the following vehicle configurations
are set and locked to prevent unauthorized modification:
VALET MODE
• All-Wheel Drive is set to 50/50.
• Transmission locks out access to first gear and up-shifts
earlier than normal.
• Stability Control, Steering, and Suspension are set to
their STREET settings.
• Steering wheel paddle shifters are disabled.
• The Drive Mode interface is not available. Pushing the
SRT button on Selec-Track switch will display the unlock
keypad.
• The ESC Off button is disabled.
• The Launch Control button is disabled.
• Engine power is reduced.
Valet Mode Activation
To enter Valet Mode press the “Valet” button on the
touchscreen and a popup screen will ask you if you would
like to enter Valet Mode, after selecting “Yes” you will be
asked to enter a four digit PIN code. The PIN code is not
set, so you are free to select any four digit numeric
combination that will be easy to remember.
MULTIMEDIA
521
Valet Mode Deactivation
Valet Mode Deactivation PIN
To exit Valet Mode you must enter the same four digit PIN
that was used to enter the mode. The unlock keypad can be
accessed by either pushing the SRT button on Selec-Track
switch, or pressing the “Valet” button on the touchscreen.
The Valet Mode Deactivation key pad will then prompt
you for your four digit PIN code, enter your PIN code and
press the “OK” button on the touchscreen. Your vehicle
will return to the default state after a key cycle.
NOTE: If your four digit PIN is lost or forgotten, the
vehicle will exit Valet Mode after a battery disconnect for
10
522 MULTIMEDIA
approximately one minute. Reconnect the battery and cycle
the ignition to the RUN position, the vehicle will be in
Default Mode.
ECO MODE
Push the ECO button on the center stack of the instrument
panel to enter ECO mode. ECO mode modifies the vehicle’s engine and transmission settings to provide improved
fuel economy at a trade-off with acceleration performance.
Increased engine exhaust noise and/or vibration may be
noticed while ECO is active. This is normal and a result of
the increased amount of operating conditions where the
vehicle is allowed to operate in four cylinder shutoff mode.
The Paddle Shifters will be disabled while in ECO mode.
• Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate ECO.
• ECO will be disabled when another Drive Mode is
selected or ECO button is pushed.
Eco Mode
MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
523
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/CD/
AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
CD Player
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go
to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within one second after the
current track begins to play.
10
524 MULTIMEDIA
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Getting Started
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats: Open the
LCD screen cover by lifting up on cover.
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and
iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully
support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
RSE System Screen
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give
your family years of enjoyment. You can play your favorite
CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs, listen to audio over the
wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of standard video games or audio devices.
• Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position.
Please review this Owner’s Manual to become familiar
with its features and operation.
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by pushing
the power button on the remote control.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-ray Disc
Player. If equipped with a Blu-ray disc player, the icon
will be present on the Player.
MULTIMEDIA
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Blu-ray
disc is inserted into the disc player, the screen(s) turn(s)
on automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on
and playback begins.
525
• With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 (Rear 1)
on the remote control and headphones, refers to Screen 1
(driver’s side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the Remote
Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (passenger
side).
10
RSE System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
RSE System Remote Control Channel Selectors
526 MULTIMEDIA
Blu-ray Disc Player
Play A Blu-ray Disc
The Blu-ray disc player is located in the center console.
RSE System Headphone Channel Selectors
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occupants
utilizing either the touchscreen radio, or by the rear seat
occupants using the remote control.
Dual Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Blu-ray Disc Player Location
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc into the VES disc player with the
label facing as indicated on the Blu-ray player. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen, the language screen, or starts playing the first track.
MULTIMEDIA
2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
switch is on Rear 1.
527
Using The Touchscreen Radio
3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 for passenger side rear
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
switch is on Rear 2.
NOTE:
• To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio, press the “Media”
button on the touchscreen, and then press the “Disc”
button. Press the “Play” button, and then the “full screen”
button.
• Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is not
available in all states/provinces. The vehicle must be
stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK
position for vehicles with automatic transmission.
Rear Media Control Screen
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 1/Channel 1. This
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button is
not highlighted, select button to access controls for Screen
1/Channel 1 source.
2. RSE Power
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
10
528 MULTIMEDIA
3. RSE Mute
8. RSE Mode
Mute rear headphones for the current ignition cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute rear headphones.
Select this button to change source for the active (highlighted) rear Screen/Channel on the rear media control
screen.
4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out
Press to enable/disable remote control functions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 2/Channel 2. This
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button is
not highlighted, select button to access controls for Screen
2/Channel 2 source.
6. Radio Full Screen Mode
Select this button to change to Full Screen Mode.
7. Cabin Audio Mode
Select this button to change the cabin audio to the rear
entertainment source currently shown on the rear media
control screen.
• Press the Media button on the touchscreen, and then
press the rear media button on the touchscreen.
• Press the OK button on the touchscreen to begin playing
the Blu-ray disc on the touchscreen radio.
Using The Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s side rear screen), and
then press the source key, and using the up and down
arrows, highlight disc from the menu and press the OK
button.
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the disc menu
and options.
MULTIMEDIA
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Audio/Video
RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat.
529
When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI
input, ensure to follow the standard color coding for the
audio/video jacks:
1. HDMI Input.
2. Right audio in (red).
3. Left audio in (white).
4. Video in (yellow).
NOTE: Certain high-end video games consoles may exceed
the power limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter.
Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen Radio
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks) on
the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video
directly from a video camera, connect video games for
display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3
player.
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray Disc with the label facing as
indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray Disc player. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
playing the first track.
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 1 (driver’s side
rear passenger), ensure the Remote Control and Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 2 (passenger’s
side rear passenger), ensure the Remote Control and
Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2.
10
530 MULTIMEDIA
Using The Remote Control
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect radio touchscreen.
2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either
pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then push
ENTER/OK.
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment Screen
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the Rear Media
Control screen.
Rear Media Control Screen
MULTIMEDIA
3. Press the 1 or 2 buttons on the touchscreen, and the
select source button on the touchscreen. Press the DISC
button on the touchscreen in the MEDIA column. To
exit, press the X at the top right of the screen.
531
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
• The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit
two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously.
• The Blu-ray Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and
Blu-ray Discs.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video source will
display on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear 1.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video source will
display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear 2.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even when
the screen(s) are closed.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
NOTE: Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or
Blu-ray Disc is playing, brings up the basic remote control
functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner will
turn OFF the remote control screen functions.
10
532 MULTIMEDIA
Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control — If Equipped
3. SOURCE — Push to enter Source Selection screen.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control. When
the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the remote
controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (left
screen). When the selector switch is in the Rear 2
position, the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (right screen).
5. 䉴 — Push to navigate menus.
6. SETUP — Push to access the screen settings menu.
7. 䉴䉴 — Push and hold to fast forward through the
current audio track or video chapter.
Blu-ray Player Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
1. Power — Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power button
to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators — When a button is pushed,
the currently affected channel or channel button is
illuminated momentarily.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) — Begin/resume or pause disc play.
9. Four Colored Buttons — Push to access Blu-ray Disc
features.
10. POPUP/MENU — Push to bring up repeat and shuffle
options, the Blu-ray Disc popup menu, the DVD title
menu, or to access disc menus.
11. KEYPAD — Push to navigate chapters or titles.
12. ▪ (Stop) — Stops disc play.
MULTIMEDIA
533
13. 䉳䉳 — Push and hold to fast rewind through the
current audio track or video chapter.
14.
— Mutes headphone audio.
15. BACK — Push to exit out of menus or return to source
selection screen.
16. 䉲 — Push to navigate menus.
17. OK — Push to select the highlighted option in a menu.
18. 䉳 — Push to navigate menus.
19. 䉱 — Push to navigate menus.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not muted
and the headphone channel selector switch is on the
desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
10
534 MULTIMEDIA
Controls
2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote control.
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
3. Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
mode.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system is
turned off.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, use
the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to
the available modes and push the OK button to select
the new mode.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone selector
switch.
NOTE:
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are
tuned to the audio on Channel 1.
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are
tuned to the audio on Channel 2.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the
BACK button on the remote control.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
MULTIMEDIA
Accessibility — If Equipped
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray system that
announces a function prior to performing the action. For
further information refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.”
Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers the
initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this particular
Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless headphone
(⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts as
long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use
is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty does
not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse,
abuse or modification of the Product other than by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time through
normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam
535
is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES
TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE
USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some
states and jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the
above limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives
you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights,
which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Unwired Do? Unwired, at its option, will repair
or replace any defective Product. Unwired reserves the
right to replace any discontinued Product with a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES
(EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY
OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
10
536 MULTIMEDIA
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-2933332 or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
Display Settings
You may register your Unwired wireless headphones by
phone at 1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a list
of all commands which control playback of the disc.
Video Screen Display Settings
When watching a video source (Blu-ray Disc or DVD Video
with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pushing the
remote control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of the
video on the screen. The factory default settings are already
set for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change
these settings under normal circumstances.
MULTIMEDIA
To change the settings, push the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then push the remote
control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the value for
the currently selected item. To reset all values back to the
original settings, select the Default Settings menu option
and push the remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray Disc player’s
settings of DVD being watched in the remote player.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.
• To change the current audio mode, push the remote
control’s SOURCE button. This will automatically select
the next available audio mode without using the Mode/
Source Select menu.
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
display menu or media.
537
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push the
remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If audio is
still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are
installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing the following
types of 4.7 in (12 cm) diameter discs:
• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1)
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
DVD-VR
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6)
profile 3.0
DVD Region Codes
The Blu-ray Disc player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in order
for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does
not match the region code for the player, the disc will not play.
10
538 MULTIMEDIA
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-ray Disc
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default
(most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the
Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program material
is automatically mixed down to two channels, which may
result in a lowered apparent volume level. If you increase
the volume level to account for this change in level,
remember to lower the volume before changing the disc or
to another mode.
Recorded Discs
The Blu-ray Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a CDROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will also
play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW
disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not
supported.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the Blu-ray Disc player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To help
avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines
when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are closed
are playable.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CDAudio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the ISO9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format. Other
formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not supported.
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the
Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable
in the Blu-ray Disc player, check with the disc recording
software publisher for more information about burning
playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
MULTIMEDIA
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
• The Blu-ray Disc player always uses the file extension to
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA files
must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or ⬙.WMA⬙.
To prevent incorrect playback, do not use these extensions for any other types of files.
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as artist
name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those downloaded from many online music stores) will not play. The
Blu-ray player will automatically skip the file and begin
playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Ogg
Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray player
will automatically skip the file and begin playing the
next available file.
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
539
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
supported. For both formats, the recommended sample
rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
Blu-ray Disc player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next
file, or the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current
or previous file.
Disc Errors
If the Blu-ray Disc player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc
Error⬙ message is displayed on the rear screen and Radio
displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc format are
all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray Disc
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the end of
the disc is reached, the Blu-ray Disc player will return to
the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of
the first track.
The Blu-ray Disc player may shut down during extremely
hot conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120° F (48.9° C). When this occurs, the
player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off the Rear
10
540 MULTIMEDIA
Seat displays until a safe temperature is reached. This
shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the Blu-ray
Disc player.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended
for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly
is prohibited.
Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, ⬙MLP Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. Copyright
1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right reserved.
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
body.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
MULTIMEDIA
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
541
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
10
542 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV
system.
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect
8.4 system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the
rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
MULTIMEDIA
543
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions. For
8.4/8.4 NAV Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
10
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
Uconnect 8.4 /8.4 NAV
544 MULTIMEDIA
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
and say
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
“Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Radio
MULTIMEDIA
545
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
auxiliary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD
player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song
and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media
10
546 MULTIMEDIA
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated
on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
following commandsѧ
. After the beep, say one of the
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the
and say Listen. (Must have compatible
Phone button
mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
MULTIMEDIA
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
Start without
No.
me.
Okay.
Where are you?
Are you there
Call me.
yet?
I need
I’ll call you later.
directions.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
547
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
RESPONSES
See you later.
I’ll be late.
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take
advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
Turn On “Show Notifications”
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
10
548 MULTIMEDIA
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Climate
MULTIMEDIA
549
Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 8.4 system. See your dealer to activate navigation
at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
beep, say:
. After the
• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
. After
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Navigation
10
550 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Access (8.4/8.4 NAV)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on
the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
MULTIMEDIA
Register (8.4/8.4 NAV)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
551
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen to
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information, please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website at moparownerconnect.com.
10
Assist Button
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the details.
552 MULTIMEDIA
Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and sending a destination from your phone to your
vehicle.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin using
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of
the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send
a location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send ‘n Go , if equipped.
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner of
the app to bring up app settings.
Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After the
beep, say the following command: “Send message to
John Smith.”
Mobile App
To use the Uconnect Access Mobile App:
• Once you have registered your Uconnect Access services,
download the Uconnect Access app to your mobile device.
Use your Owner Account login and password to open the
app.
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message
you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to process
your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy with
your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
MULTIMEDIA
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
TIP:
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
553
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if your
vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen,
, then say: “YELP search.”
push the VR button
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
Turn On “Show Notifications”
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like Uconnect
to find.
10
554 MULTIMEDIA
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. (Not
available for 8.4 system or vehicles sold in the Canadian
market.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
Yelp
MULTIMEDIA
555
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages and many
other useful requests.
10
SiriusXM Travel Link
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and will
respond back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
Siri Eyes Free Available
556 MULTIMEDIA
Getting Started
Ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone.
Voice Recognition/Siri Buttons
Siri Enable Screens
1 — Select Settings On Your
iPhone
2 — Select General
3 — Select Siri
4 — Enable Siri
1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the vehicles sound
system. Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for a detailed pairing procedure.
1 — Phone Pick Up Button
2 — Voice Recognition/Siri Eyes Free Button
3 — Phone Hang Up Button
NOTE: A push and release of the
button will start
normal embedded VR functions. The push and hold,
button will start Siri functions.
then release of the
MULTIMEDIA
557
2. After the double beep, begin speaking to Siri.
Examples of Siri commands and questions:
• ⬙Play Rolling Stones⬙
• ⬙Send text message to John⬙
• ⬙Read text message from Sarah⬙
• ⬙Take me to the nearest coffee shop⬙
NOTE:
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead to ensure your command is
understood.
• Siri is available on iPhone 4S and later.
Siri Eyes Free
10
558 MULTIMEDIA
Do Not Disturb
NOTE:
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and
send it to voicemail.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
MULTIMEDIA
Additional Information
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp
logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
For Uconnect system support, call: 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
559
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged, (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . . .565
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . .563
11
562 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 563
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
11
564 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within
three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is
not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 565
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
11
566 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
INDEX
12
568 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . . .275
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Adjust
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . .220, 398
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136, 211, 242
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . . . .411
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 411, 416
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415, 416
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83, 415
Air Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 138, 159
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427, 473
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Audio Systems (Radio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Automatic Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . .83
INDEX 569
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257, 433
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433, 475
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432, 475
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . . .262
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .112
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140, 408
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Brake Control System, Electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431, 475
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430, 467
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431, 475
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle. . . . . . . . . .251
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406, 409, 410
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 472
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
12
570 INDEX
Cargo Tie-Downs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .161
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .234
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .227
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .224
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Cold Weather Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Console, Overhead. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 429
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . .427, 473, 474
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . .271, 275
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 155, 157, 158
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
INDEX 571
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Defroster, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Door Ajar Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System). . . . . . . . .524
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .112
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .272
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . . .141
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Emission Control System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .161
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 472
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 473, 474
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406, 409, 410
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 473
12
572 INDEX
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248, 249
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 410
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . .220, 398
Ethanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 472
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 424
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 244
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 411, 416
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411, 474
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 244, 371
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Fluid Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Fluid Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Fluids And Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Folding Rear Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 43
Forward Collision Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Four-Way Hazard Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469, 474
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Fueling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink). . . . . . . . . . . .101, 105
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
INDEX 573
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating. . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.258
.463
.348
.348
.346
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Hazard Warning Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Headlights
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 364
Instrument Cluster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139, 140, 151, 154
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Instrument Cluster Display
Information Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
iPod Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384, 435
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
12
574 INDEX
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .23, 31
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .21
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . .23
Key-In Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Key, Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 31
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
LaneSense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 95
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136, 211, 242
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 155, 157, 158
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .144
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 154, 244, 371
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .139, 154
Loading Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
INDEX 575
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Locks
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .144, 161
Manual, Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 45
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 45
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 45
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Mini-Trip Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 364
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469, 474
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 474
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411, 474
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 473
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 410, 473
12
576 INDEX
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . .4, 565
Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295, 305
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127, 512
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . .441
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Power Seats
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 30, 32
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
INDEX 577
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295, 305
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 43
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Reformulated Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .23, 31
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . . . .523
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 31
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Retractable Cargo Area Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schedule, Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . .
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . .
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . .
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . .
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.242
.244
.565
.241
.435
.241
.401
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.203
.206
.206
.201
.199
.203
.205
.205
.206
.198
.461
.198
12
578 INDEX
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198, 242
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .203
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198, 199, 201
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 42, 49
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 42
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 48
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 49
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 45
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 43
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 51
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 51
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 138
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Selection Of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Sentry Key
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 31
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254, 257
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 244, 371
Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555, 556
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383, 452, 453, 454
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273, 274
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
INDEX 579
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . .271, 272, 275
SRT Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 248, 249
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248, 249
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248, 249
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .523
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 459
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . . .212
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Tire And Loading Information Placard. . . . . . . . . . . .441
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244, 445, 452, 458
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390, 435
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445, 452
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 442
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
12
580 INDEX
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390, 450
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435, 445
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383, 452, 454
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257, 432
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . .101
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 371
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . .
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . .
Uconnect Voice Command . .
Uniform Tire Quality Grades
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
INDEX 581
Universal Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346, 442
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . .32
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 459
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 410
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Washers, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 407
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 91
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Windows
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 407
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Wiper Blade Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
12
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2017 Grand Cherokee SRT
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
17WK742-126-AE
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2017
OWNER’S MANUAL
Fifth Edition Rev 3
Printed in U.S.A.
Grand Cherokee
SRT
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising